1678 Troubleshooting

Use pursuant to applicable agreements
Title page
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) | Release 05.06.01

Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide
MTCG
3AG 24782 CAAA TQZZA
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Issue 4
December 2011
Legal notice
Legal notice
Alcatel, Lucent, Alcatel-Lucent and the Alcatel-Lucent logo are trademarks of Alcatel-Lucent. All other trademarks are the property of their respective
owners.
The information presented is subject to change without notice. Alcatel-Lucent assumes no responsibility for inaccuracies contained herein.
Copyright © 2011 Alcatel-Lucent. All rights reserved.
Contains proprietary/trade secret information which is the property of Alcatel-Lucent and must not be made available to, or copied or used by anyone outside
Alcatel-Lucent without its written authorization.
Not to be used or disclosed except in accordance with applicable agreements.
Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary
Contents
About this document

Purpose .......................................................................................................................................................................................... xiii
xiii
Reason for reissue ...................................................................................................................................................................... xiii

xiii
Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xiv

xiv
Orientation aids ........................................................................................................................................................................... xiv

xiv
Conventions used ......................................................................................................................................................................... xv

xv
Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xvi

xvi
Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xvii

xvii
How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xvii

xvii
1 Safety
Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1

1-1
Safety awareness ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

1-3
Electrostatic sensitive devices ........................................................................................................................................... 1-17

1-17
2 General information
Product support information ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

2-1
3 Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures
Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

3-1
Alarm and event condition clearing procedures ............................................................................................................ 3-4

3-4
Support procedures ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-25

3-25
Equipment replacement procedures ................................................................................................................................. 3-27

3-27
Supporting information ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-29

3-29
Preventive maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................................ 3-30

3-30
Procedure 3-1: Facility alarm or event ........................................................................................................................... 3-31

3-31
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary iii
3AG 24782 CAAA TQZZA Release Use pursuant to applicable agreements
05.06.01
Issue 4 December 2011
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: CONTBUS ................................................................................................................................................. 3-62
3-62
Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-65

3-65
Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP) ................................................................................................................ 3-67

3-67
Procedure 3-5: FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) .......................................................................................... 3-69

3-69
Procedure 3-6: HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) .................................................................................. 3-72

3-72
Procedure 3-7: HWCFGBUS alarm ................................................................................................................................ 3-76

3-76
Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-77

3-77
Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm ........................................................................................................................... 3-79

3-79
Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ....................................................................... 3-81

3-81
Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm ......................................................................................................................................... 3-83

3-83
Procedure 3-12: LCASSEQ alarm ................................................................................................................................... 3-85

3-85
Procedure 3-13: MAN alarm (equipment) .................................................................................................................... 3-86

3-86
Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR ............................................................................................................................................ 3-89

3-89
Procedure 3-15: PWR ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-91

3-91
Procedure 3-16: SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA) ........................................................................................ 3-95

3-95
Procedure 3-17: COM alarm or event ............................................................................................................................. 3-98

3-98
Procedure 3-18: MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA) ............................................................................................... 3-112

3-112
Procedure 3-19: INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ............................................................. 3-113

3-113
Procedure 3-20: LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-116
............................................................................................................................................................................................. 3-116
Procedure 3-21: LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) .................................................................... 3-118

3-118
Procedure 3-22: STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA) ........................................................................ 3-119

3-119
Procedure 3-23: HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN) ........................................................................................ 3-120

3-120
Procedure 3-24: SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC) .......................................................................................................... 3-125

3-125
Procedure 3-25: Lamp test (RAU) ................................................................................................................................. 3-126

3-126
Procedure 3-26: MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA) ...................................................................................... 3-129

3-129
Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and replacement ......................................................................... 3-130

3-130
Procedure 3-28: OC-n input/output card replacement ............................................................................................ 3-132

3-132
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
iv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
Use pursuant to applicable agreements 3AG 24782 CAAA TQZZA Release
05.06.01
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-29: XFP replacement ................................................................................................................................. 3-138
3-138
Procedure 3-30: SFP replacement .................................................................................................................................. 3-144

3-144
Procedure 3-31: FLCSERVA replacement .................................................................................................................. 3-148

3-148
Procedure 3-32: FLCCONGI replacement ................................................................................................................. 3-158

3-158
Procedure 3-33: MX320GA/MX640GA replacement ............................................................................................ 3-168

3-168
Procedure 3-34: PSF replacement .................................................................................................................................. 3-171

3-171
Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement ................................................................................................................................ 3-175

3-175
Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement .................................................................................................................. 3-177

3-177
Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement ............................................................................................................ 3-179

3-179
Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection ............................................................................................................... 3-181

3-181
Procedure 3-39: 2-kW step-up converter replacement ........................................................................................... 3-183

3-183
Procedure 3-40: Clean fiber-optic connectors ........................................................................................................... 3-187

3-187
Procedure 3-41: ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration ................................................................. 3-199

3-199
Procedure 3-42: ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration ......................................................... 3-202

3-202
Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement ............................................................................................................................... 3-206

3-206
Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement ........................................................................................................................ 3-208

3-208
Procedure 3-45: Gigabit Ethernet card replacement ............................................................................................... 3-210

3-210
Procedure 3-46: 2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter upgrade .............................................................................. 3-214

3-214
Procedure 3-47: 2.2 kW step-up converter replacement ....................................................................................... 3-222

3-222
Procedure 3-48: 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement ......................................................................................... 3-226

3-226
Procedure 3-49: MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix upgrade procedure ....................................... 3-230
3-230
Glossary
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary v
05.06.01
Contents
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
vi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
List of tables
1 Reason for reissue ..................................................................................................................................................... xiii

xiii
3-1 Condition types .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-5

3-5
3-2 Support procedures ................................................................................................................................................. 3-25
3-3 Equipment replacement procedures ................................................................................................................. 3-27
3-4 Supporting information ......................................................................................................................................... 3-29
3-5 Preventive maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................. 3-30
3-6 Facility alarms/conditions .................................................................................................................................... 3-31

3-31
3-7 COM Alarms/Conditions ...................................................................................................................................... 3-98
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary vii
05.06.01
List of tables
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
viii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
List of figures
1-1 Laser warning labels ................................................................................................................................................. 1-7

1-7
1-2 Shelf laser warning labels ....................................................................................................................................... 1-8
1-3 Laser radiation label on module ........................................................................................................................... 1-9
1-4 Subrack labels, view 1 ........................................................................................................................................... 1-10
1-5 Subrack label, view 2 ............................................................................................................................................. 1-11
1-6 Labels on units with standard cover plate ...................................................................................................... 1-12
1-7 Module label ............................................................................................................................................................. 1-13

1-13
1-8 Internal label for printed board assembly ....................................................................................................... 1-13
1-9 Internal backpanel label ........................................................................................................................................ 1-14

1-14
1-10 Part number and serial number label (item on catalog) ............................................................................ 1-14
1-11 Equipment name label ........................................................................................................................................... 1-15

1-15
1-12 Communauté Européenne (CE) label .............................................................................................................. 1-15
1-13 Waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) label ........................................................................ 1-15
1-14 Item identification label (item on catalog) ..................................................................................................... 1-16
1-15 Part number and serial number label (item not on catalog) ..................................................................... 1-16
1-16 Electrostatic-sensitive sign .................................................................................................................................. 1-17

1-17
1-17 Wrist band and cord ............................................................................................................................................... 1-18
3-1 MAC address label position on board ........................................................................................................... 3-150
3-2 MAC address on the label ................................................................................................................................. 3-151
3-3 First-level controller and service interface board – front view ............................................................ 3-152
3-4 MAC address label position on board ........................................................................................................... 3-160
3-5 MAC address on the label ................................................................................................................................. 3-161
3-6 First-level controller and control and general interface – front view ................................................ 3-162
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary ix
05.06.01
List of figures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-7 Step-up converter wire jumper removal detail ........................................................................................... 3-185
3-8 Fiber-optic connector inspection ..................................................................................................................... 3-190
3-9 Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations ..................................................................................................... 3-192
3-10 Fiber-optic connector types, photographs .................................................................................................... 3-193
3-11 Optical removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA) ................................................................. 3-196
3-12 Location of the compact flash card on the ES64SC ................................................................................. 3-203
3-13 Compact flash card removed from the ES64SC ........................................................................................ 3-204
3-14 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings .................................................................................................... 3-217
3-15 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings .................................................................................................... 3-224
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
x Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
List of procedures
3 Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures
3-1 Facility alarm or event ........................................................................................................................................... 3-31

3-31
3-2 CONTBUS ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-62

3-62
3-3 FA (Fuse alarm) ....................................................................................................................................................... 3-65

3-65
3-4 FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP) ............................................................................................................................... 3-67
3-5 FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) ......................................................................................................... 3-69
3-6 HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) ................................................................................................. 3-72
3-7 HWCFGBUS alarm ............................................................................................................................................... 3-76

3-76
3-8 HWFAIL ..................................................................................................................................................................... 3-77

3-77
3-9 IMPROPRMVL alarm .......................................................................................................................................... 3-79
3-10 INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ......................................................................................... 3-81
3-11 ISPBUS alarm .......................................................................................................................................................... 3-83

3-83
3-12 LCASSEQ alarm ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-85

3-85
3-13 MAN alarm (equipment) ...................................................................................................................................... 3-86
3-14 PRCDRERR .............................................................................................................................................................. 3-89

3-89
3-15 PWR ............................................................................................................................................................................. 3-91

3-91
3-16 SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA) .......................................................................................................... 3-95
3-17 COM alarm or event .............................................................................................................................................. 3-98

3-98
3-18 MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA) ................................................................................................................. 3-112
3-19 INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ............................................................................... 3-113
3-20 LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA) ................... 3-116
3-21 LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ..................................................................................... 3-118
3-22 STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA) .......................................................................................... 3-119
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xi
05.06.01
List of procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3-23 HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN) .......................................................................................................... 3-120
3-24 SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC) ............................................................................................................................ 3-125
3-25 Lamp test (RAU) .................................................................................................................................................. 3-126

3-126
3-26 MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA) ........................................................................................................ 3-129
3-27 Module mechanical removal and replacement .......................................................................................... 3-130
3-28 OC-n input/output card replacement ............................................................................................................. 3-132
3-29 XFP replacement ................................................................................................................................................... 3-138

3-138
3-30 SFP replacement .................................................................................................................................................... 3-144

3-144
3-31 FLCSERVA replacement .................................................................................................................................... 3-148
3-32 FLCCONGI replacement ................................................................................................................................... 3-158
3-33 MX320GA/MX640GA replacement ............................................................................................................. 3-168
3-34 PSF replacement ................................................................................................................................................... 3-171

3-171
3-35 FAN replacement .................................................................................................................................................. 3-175

3-175
3-36 BUSTERM replacement .................................................................................................................................... 3-177
3-37 FAN dust filter replacement .............................................................................................................................. 3-179
3-38 Clean FAN unit protection ................................................................................................................................ 3-181
3-39 2-kW step-up converter replacement ............................................................................................................. 3-183
3-40 Clean fiber-optic connectors ............................................................................................................................. 3-187
3-41 ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration ................................................................................... 3-199
3-42 ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration ........................................................................... 3-202
3-43 RAU replacement ................................................................................................................................................. 3-206

3-206
3-44 BYPASS replacement ......................................................................................................................................... 3-208
3-45 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement ................................................................................................................. 3-210
3-46 2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter upgrade ................................................................................................ 3-214
3-47 2.2 kW step-up converter replacement ......................................................................................................... 3-222
3-48 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement ........................................................................................................... 3-226
3-49 MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix upgrade procedure ......................................................... 3-230
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
About this document
About this document
Purpose
This Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide (MTCG) provides information on the
alarm messages which can be generated by the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) network
elements. Furthermore, it provides procedures for routine maintenance, troubleshooting,
diagnostics, and component replacement.
Reason for reissue

The reissue history of this document is shown in the following table:
Table 1 Reason for reissue
Location Reissue Issue

Procedure 3-31: “FLCSERVA Trouble-clearing procedure Issue 4, October 2011
replacement” (p. 3-148) for FLCSERVA replacement
Procedure 3-32: “FLCCONGI corrected
replacement” (p. 3-158) Trouble-clearing procedure
for FLCCONGI replacement
corrected
Procedure 3-7: “HWCFGBUS Trouble-clearing procedure Issue 3, June 2011
alarm” (p. 3-76) for HWCFGBUS inserted
Procedure 3-11: “ISPBUS alarm” Trouble-clearing procedure
(p. 3-83) for ISPBUS alarm inserted
Procedure 3-12: “LCASSEQ Trouble-clearing procedure
alarm” (p. 3-85) for LCASSEQ alarm
Procedure 3-15: “PWR” (p. 3-91) inserted
Trouble-clearing procedure
for PWR alarm extended
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xiii
05.06.01
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 1 Reason for reissue (continued)
Location Reissue Issue

The complete 1678 Metro Issue 2, May 2011
Core Connect (MCC)
documentation set has been
updated to Issue 2 to reflect
latest system development.
Safety information
For your safety, this document contains safety statements. Safety statements are given at
points where risks of damage to personnel, equipment, and operation may exist. Failure to
follow the directions in a safety statement may result in serious consequences.
Orientation aids
This document contains the following orientation aids:
• Overall TOC
• Chapter TOCs
• Index
The following graphic depicts the principle structure of this document:
Overall TOC
Chapter TOC
Index
Overall TOC
The overall table of contents (TOC) provides a structural overview of the entire
document. It lists the content of each chapter and the associated page number where the
respective information can be found.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xiv Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The overall table of contents can be found after the legal page, before the “About this
document” preface.
Chapter TOCs
Each chapter contains a table of contents (TOC) in its “Overview” section. The scope of
each chapter TOC is limited to the corresponding chapter. As in the overall TOC, page
numbers indicate where the respective information can be found.
Index
This manual also contains an alphabetical index, which can be found at the end of the
document, after the “Glossary”.
The index helps users to find specific information quickly by providing an alphabetical
list of key words with associated page numbers.
Conventions used
The following conventions are used in this document:
Numbering
The chapters of this document are numbered consecutively. The page numbering restarts
at “1” in each chapter. To facilitate identifying pages in different chapters, the page
numbers are prefixed with the chapter number. For example, page 2-3 is the third page in
chapter 2.
Cross-references
Cross-reference conventions are identical with the conventions used for numbering. The
first number in a reference to a particular page refers to the corresponding chapter.
Keyword blocks
This document contains so-called keyword blocks to facilitate the location of specific text
passages. The keyword blocks are placed to the left of the main text and indicate the
contents of a paragraph or group of paragraphs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xv
05.06.01
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Typographical conventions
Special typographical conventions apply to elements of the graphical user interface
(GUI), file names and system path information, keyboard entries, alarm messages, and so
on.
• Examples of text that appears on a graphical user interface (GUI), such as menu
options, window titles, or buttons:
– Provision…, Delete, Apply, Close, OK (buttons)
– Provision Timing/Sync (window title)
– Administration → Security → User Provisioning… (path for invoking a window)
• Examples for file names and system path information:
– setup.exe
– C:\Program Files\Alcatel-Lucent
• Examples for keyboard entries:
– F1, Esc X, Alt-F, Ctrl-D, Ctrl-Alt-Del (simple keyboard entries)
A hyphen between two keys means that both keys have to be pressed
simultaneously. Otherwise, press a single key or a number of keys in sequence.
– copy abc xyz
Enter the complete command.
• Examples for alarms and error messages:
– Loss of Signal
– HP-UNEQ, MS-AIS, LOS, LOF
Abbreviations
The abbreviations used in this document are explained in the “Glossary” unless it can be
assumed that the reader is familiar with the abbreviation.
Related information
The manuals related to 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) are shown in the following
table:
Document title Document code
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Product Information and Planning Guide 3AG 24782 AAAA TQZZA
Presents a detailed overview of the system, describes its applications, gives planning
requirements, engineering rules, ordering information, and technical specifications.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) TL1 User Provisioning Guide 3AG 24782 BAAA TQZZA
Provides step-by-step information for use in daily system operations. The manual demonstrates
how to perform system provisioning, operations, and administrative tasks.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing Guide 3AG 24782 CAAA TQZZA
Gives detailed information on each possible alarm message. Furthermore, it provides procedures
for routine maintenance, troubleshooting, diagnostics, and component replacement.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xvi Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Document title Document code
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) TL1 Command Guide 3EM 246580606 RKZZA
A reference for all TL1 commands which can be used to operate the network element. The
manual gives an introduction to the concept of the TL1 commands and instructs how to use them.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Installation and System Turn-Up Guide 3AG 24782 EAAA TQZZA
A step-by-step guide to system installation and setup. It also includes information needed for
pre-installation site planning and post-installation acceptance testing.
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Documentation CD-ROM (all manuals on a CD-ROM) 3AG 24783 AAAA ADZZA
These documents and drawings can be ordered at or downloaded from the Alcatel-Lucent
Online Customer Support Site (OLCS) (https://support.lucent.com) or through your Local
Customer Support.
Technical support
For technical support, contact your local Alcatel-Lucent customer support team. See the
Alcatel-Lucent Support web site (http://www.alcatel-lucent.com/support/) for contact
information.
How to comment
To comment on this document, go to the Online Comment Form (http://infodoc.alcatel-
lucent.com/comments/) or e-mail your comments to the Comments Hotline
(comments@alcatel-lucent.com).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary xvii
05.06.01
About this document
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
xviii Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
1 Safety
1
Structure of safety statements

Overview
This topic describes the components of safety statements that appear in this document.
General structure
Safety statements include the following structural elements:
B C D
CAUTION
M P L E
Lifting hazard E F
SA
Lifting this equipment by yourself can result in injury
due to the size and weight of the equipment.
G
Always use three people or a lifting device to transport
and position this equipment. [ABC123]
H
Item Structure element Purpose
1 Safety alert symbol Indicates the potential for personal injury
(optional)
2 Safety symbol Indicates hazard type (optional)
3 Signal word Indicates the severity of the hazard
4 Hazard type Describes the source of the risk of damage or
injury
5 Safety message Consequences if protective measures fail
6 Avoidance message Protective measures to take to avoid the hazard
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary 1-1
05.06.01
Safety Structure of safety statements
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Item Structure element Purpose

7 Identifier The reference ID of the safety statement
(optional)
Signal words
The signal words identify the hazard severity levels as follows:
Signal word Meaning

DANGER Indicates an extremely hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will
result in death or serious injury.
WARNING Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
death or serious injury.
CAUTION Indicates a hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in
minor or moderate injury.
NOTICE Indicates a hazardous situation not related to personal injury.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
1-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
Safety Safety awareness
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Safety awareness
Fan, equipment rack, and equipment cabinet precautions
When installing the equipment observe the following:
DANGER
Possibility of personal injury.
Keep fingers away from the rotating fan blades. Pull the fan-tray by the thumbscrews only
and wait for the fan blades to stop spinning before attempting to remove the fan-tray
completely from the shelf.
CAUTION
Lifting hazard
The Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) requires at least three people to
support, align, and attach it to an equipment rack. To prevent equipment damage or
personal injury, make sure help is available.
WARNING
Risk of injury due to unsecured shelf.
To prevent personal injury and equipment damage due to unbalanced loading of the
equipment rack or cabinet, make sure the equipment rack or cabinet is properly secured
to the floor, ceiling, or other rigid structure before mounting the Alcatel-Lucent 1678
Metro Core Connect (MCC) in it. For approved methods of securing the equipment rack,
read the equipment-rack installation instructions or contact the equipment-rack
manufacturer.
Electrical precautions
Take appropriate safety precautions when performing procedures on electrical equipment.
Hazardous electrical potentials are present when system power is on.
Some procedures in this manual require working with small conductive objects, such as
screwdrivers, fuses, washers, screws, and nuts. When working on a shelf at the top of an
equipment rack, a dropped object that falls into a lower shelf can cause physical damage
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
and electrical short circuits. To prevent this, place a piece of paper or other cover over the
lower shelf to catch fallen objects. Remove the paper or other cover when work is
complete.
Restricted access locations
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Install the Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) in a restricted-access area
only. Entrance to a restricted-access area is intended for qualified or trained personnel
and access to it is controlled by a locked barrier.
NOTICE
Possibility of equipment damage.
The shelf does not contain main over-current protection devices.
The user must provide circuit breakers or fuses and disconnects between the power source
and the Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC). Each power feed from a source
(−48 V DC and Return) requires a 25-amp DC-rated fast-trip circuit breaker or fuse and
disconnect. Circuit breakers or fuses must meet applicable local and national electrical
safety codes and be approved for the intended application.
WARNING
Make sure to connect the node to a −48 V DC source that is electrically isolated from the
AC source and is reliably connected to earth ground.
WARNING
For personal safety, make sure to connect and secure the installation site’s frame-ground
(earth ground) wire to the frame ground terminal on the 1678 Metro Core Connect
(MCC) before connecting any other wires to the node.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WARNING
A DC-power source provides high energy, which can cause serious injury or equipment
damage.
Only Alcatel-Lucent qualified personnel should connect the dc power to the
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC). To prevent serious injury or equipment
damage, make sure the power source cables are de-energized before handling or
connecting them to the node.
Laser precautions
Verify that laser labels on equipment state that the system conforms to all applicable
standards of 21 CFR 1040.10. See Figure 1-1, “Laser warning labels” (p. 1-7). If there are
no danger labels, call the Alcatel-Lucent Technical Support Center (TSC). See Figure 1-2,
“Shelf laser warning labels” (p. 1-8) through Figure 1-9, “Internal backpanel label”
(p. 1-14) for label locations on equipment. See Figure 1-10, “Part number and serial
number label (item on catalog)” (p. 1-14) through Figure 1-15, “Part number and serial
number label (item not on catalog)” (p. 1-16) for illustrations of labels called out in
Figure 1-4, “Subrack labels, view 1” (p. 1-10) through Figure 1-9, “Internal backpanel
label” (p. 1-14).
The invisible infrared radiation emitted by the fiber-optic transmitter can cause eye
damage. Observe local office procedures and the following dangers:
DANGER
Laser hazard
Laser infrared radiation is not in the visible spectrum; therefore, it is not visible to the
naked eye or with laser safety glasses. Although it cannot be seen, laser radiation may be
present.
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never look directly into an unterminated fiber-optic connector unless it is absolutely
known that no optical power is being emitted by the connector.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never look directly into a broken optical fiber cable unless it is absolutely known that no
laser radiation is present.
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never look at an optical fiber splice, cable, or connector unless it is absolutely known
that no laser radiation is present in the fiber. Laser radiation can come from a fiber-optic
transmitter, an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR), or other optical test
equipment.
DANGER
Laser hazard
Never look directly into an unterminated optical connector or cable with a
magnifier/microscope unless it is absolutely known that no laser radiation is being
emitted from the connector or cable. A magnifier or microscope greatly increases the
laser radiation hazard to the eyes.
DANGER
Laser hazard
This system uses Hazard Levels 1 and 1M. During servicing operations when optical
connectors are being connected, disconnected, or handled without dust covers, it is
possible to be exposed to laser radiation that can cause eye damage. See Figure 1-1,
“Laser warning labels” (p. 1-7) for examples of laser warning labels.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CAUTION
Laser hazard
Possibility of personal injury. The use of controls and/or adjustments, or the performance
of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous infrared radiation
exposure.
Figure 1-1 Laser warning labels

ADHESIVE LABELS ON THE FRONT PANEL
(BLACK PRINT ON YELLOW BACKGROUND)
678-0317-1
022307
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DANGER
Laser hazard
Everyone within a 10 ft radius of an unterminated optical fiber or connector that is
connected to a powered transmitter must wear laser safety goggles or eye shields.
Laser safety goggles or eye shields are not required if the following work rules are strictly
followed:
1. Always remove electrical power from fiber-optic transmitters before disconnecting
fiber-optic connectors in the path between the transmitter and the receiver.
2. Never connect an unterminated optical cable to a fiber-optic transmitter. Always
connect fiber-optic cables to fiber-optic receivers, test sets, or some other termination
first.
Figure 1-2 Shelf laser warning labels
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-3 Laser radiation label on module
LASER
RADIATION
LABEL
PUSH
PUSH
678-0190-1
022006
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-4 Subrack labels, view 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-5 Subrack label, view 2
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-6 Labels on units with standard cover plate
ITEM IDENTIFICATION LABEL

(ITEM ON CATALOG)
PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM ON CATALOG)
XXXXXXXXX
XXXXXX
XXXXXX
ABC
678-0180-1
022006
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-7 Module label
PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM ON CATALOG)
ABC
678-0181-1
022006
Figure 1-8 Internal label for printed board assembly
ABC
PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM NOT ON CATALOG)
678-0182-1
022006
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-9 Internal backpanel label
PART NUMBER/
SERIAL NUMBER LABEL
(ITEM NOT ON CATALOG)
ABC
678-0183-1
022006
Figure 1-10 Part number and serial number label (item on catalog)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-11 Equipment name label
EQUIPMENT NAME
678-0187-1
022006
Figure 1-12 Communauté Européenne (CE) label
678-0188-1
022006
Figure 1-13 Waste electrical and electronic equipment (WEEE) label
678-0189-1
022006
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 1-14 Item identification label (item on catalog)
FREQUENCY ACRONYM
(Optional)
ANV ITEM PART NUMBER
678-0186-1
022006
Figure 1-15 Part number and serial number label (item not on catalog)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Safety Electrostatic sensitive devices
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Electrostatic sensitive devices

Electrostatic sensitivity
An electrostatic-sensitive (ESS) device can withstand voltage spikes of only 10 to 100
volts and can be damaged or effectively destroyed by a discharge that might go unnoticed
by a technician. Some devices have built-in protection. However, because this protection
is effective only against the lower levels of electrostatic charges, a false sense of security
often prevails.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Common plastic, white foam, cellophane, and masking adhesive tapes must not come in
contact with ESS devices or their packaging.
Common plastics (synthetic insulating materials), clothing, and paper or cardboard are
the most common sources of static charges.
Observe special precautions when the ESS sign is displayed. See Figure 1-16,
“Electrostatic-sensitive sign” (p. 1-17).
Figure 1-16 Electrostatic-sensitive sign
The following items are examples of ESS devices:

• MOS (Metal Oxide Semiconductor) capacitors, transistors, Integrated Circuits (ICs)
• CMOS (Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor) transistors, ICs
• JFET (Junction Field Effect Transistors)
• IGFET (Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistors)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Handling modules
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Although the risk of damage to an ESS device is reduced considerably after it is
assembled into a circuit designed to protect sensitive components, take the
following precautions to reduce static charges to harmless levels:
• Handle all modules as ESS devices unless they are known not to contain
electrostatic-sensitive parts.
Heel straps are effective only while standing on conductive or
electrostatic-dissipative surfaces.
• Wear ground straps, wrist (PN 1AD012470001) before and while touching or
handling circuit packs containing ESDs. See Figure 1-17, “Wrist band and
cord” (p. 1-18) for an illustration of the wrist strap with cord. The wrist
strap is an elasticized band connected to the coiled cord connected to the
rack frame ground.
• Store (even temporarily), pack, and ship modules in antistatic bags or
containers.
• Do not handle printed circuit board or components unnecessarily. Use
plastic handle.
• Do not use synthetic bristled brushes or acid brushes to clean modules.
• Handle failed modules with same precautions as good modules.
Figure 1-17 Wrist band and cord
ELASTICIZED BAND
COILED CORD
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Repairing modules
To protect ESS devices during repair, take the following precautions:
• The workbench must be earth-grounded, and the work surface must be covered with
an antistatic or static dissipative material bonded to the bench (bolt). A field service
kit (PN 1AD068980001) or equivalent can be used if an adequate workbench is not
available.
• Repair technicians must wear a wrist strap of 250 kilohms to 2 meg ohms that
contacts the repair technician's skin and the bolt bonding the covering to the bench or
safety ground. The wrist strap must be connected before parts are removed from
packaging.
• All electrical equipment must be grounded using a 3-wire power cord.
• Clothing must not touch the device under repair.
• ESS devices are delivered with protective packing (containers or conductive foam).
The devices should remain in their original containers until needed.
• Containers with ESS devices must contact the antistatic work surface, and the wrist
strap must be connected before parts are removed from packaging. Devices must be
handled by their bodies. Leads must be contacted only when necessary.
• Test setups must have correct voltage polarity.
• Volt Ohm Milliamp (VOM)-type meters must not be used to measure resistance; they
can damage devices.
• Only antistatic (metallized) desoldering tools should be used.
ESS devices are protected when properly packaged in conductive or antistatic packaging.
Acceptable packaging is marked as either conductive or antistatic.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
2 General information
2
Product support information

Telephone support
Customer service telephone support
For telephone support for the customer services mentioned in this Product Support
Information, call the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at 1-(888) 252-2832 for details, 8:00
a.m. to 5:00 p.m., Central Time, Monday through Friday. Ask the operator for the
appropriate service to be connected to a qualified representative or engineer.
After-hours emergency telephone support is also available by calling the Alcatel-Lucent
Welcome Center at 1-(888) 252-2832. An emergency is defined as an out-of-service,
traffic-affecting problem or a non-operating alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
Product documentation and training

Product documentation
Product documentation is available on both paper and CD-ROM. The documentation can
also be accessed through Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support Documentation and Software
web site at https://support.alcatel-lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do (https://support.alcatel-
lucent.com/portal/olcsHome.do).
Product documentation updates appear on Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support
Documentation and Software web site before they are available in any other format.
At Alcatel-Lucent's Online Support Documentation and Software web site, follow the
on-screen instructions to register for access and obtain a login ID. In addition to accessing
product documentation, the Alcatel-Lucent Online Support Documentation and Software
web site allows the user to view the following:
• Application notes
• Configuration notes
• Data collections
• Frequently Asked Questions (FAQs)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
General information Product support information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• General information books
• General Release Documents (GRDs)
• Installation documents
• Methods of Procedure (MOPs)
• Product Change Notifications (PCNs)
• Product Information Bulletins (PIBs)
• Product manual updates
• Software patch and software load documents
• Software Update Documents (SUDs)
• Technical bulletins
• Training documents
• Urgent Product Warnings (UPWs)
Training
Equipment training is available to all customers. Crafts and maintenance personnel who
are trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training department can expect more effective assistance
if they need to call the Technical Support Center. Regularly scheduled courses are
available at the training facilities in Plano, Texas. If a customer cannot attend a standard
course, the Training department can arrange a course for a specific requirement and
conduct it at the customer's facility. For further information, call customer service
telephone support and ask for a training coordinator or write to one of the following
addresses:
In USA: In CANADA:
Alcatel-Lucent USA Alcatel-Lucent Canada
3400 W. Plano Pkwy. Network Services Division
Plano, Texas 75075 P.O. Box 13600
ATTN: Training M/S 1206-553 Ottawa, Ontario K2K 2E6
The annual Product Training Catalog can be ordered by calling the training coordinator,
or it can be viewed online at http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog
(http://www1.alcatel-lucent.com/us/product_training/catalog).
Technical Support Center

The Technical Support Center (TSC) staff is always ready to provide high-quality
technical assistance. Customers can expect effective telephone assistance when their
crafts and maintenance personnel have been trained by Alcatel-Lucent's Training
department and are equipped with adequate test equipment, spares, and documentation at
the site.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For technical assistance, call Alcatel-Lucent's customer Technical Support Center at
1-(888) 252-2832.
After-hours emergency telephone support
Emergency support is available after-hours for emergencies by calling 1-(888) 252-2832.
An emergency is defined as an out-of-service, traffic-affecting problem or a nonoperating
alarm system on traffic-bearing systems.
Nonemergency is defined as installation turn-ups, application questions, traffic cutover,
routine maintenance, or other non-service-affecting maintenance. All non-service-
affecting, after-hours telephone services are billable to the customer.
Please provide the operator with the following information:
• Company name
• Caller name
• A telephone number where caller can be reached
• A brief description of the problem, including the product involved
After-hours non-emergency telephone support
After-hours telephone support to address new installations, system expansions, system
operations, system application, or other non-service-affecting issues is available by
contacting Alcatel-Lucent at 1-(888) 252-2832.
On-site technical support
On-site technical support is available when an issue cannot be resolved remotely. This
determination is usually made by Alcatel-Lucent TSC during the problem investigation
process. These services may or may not be billable to a customer. This depends on several
factors such as what type of Service Level Agreement a customer has with
Alcatel-Lucent, the age of the product, etc.
Repair and return services

As part of a comprehensive technical support program, Alcatel-Lucent provides factory
repair services for equipment. This service is available both during and after the warranty
period through Alcatel-Lucent's Return and Repair department.
Spare parts and replacement cards

For spare parts, spare cards, card exchange, and in-warranty replacement on a routine or
emergency basis, call customer service telephone support.
Provide the following information:
• Customer Contact Name
• Customer Company Name
• Company name
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
• Customer telephone number
• Customer E-mail Address
• A brief description of the problem, including product line, part number, and quantity
of parts needed
For emergency assistance after normal business hours, call customer service telephone
support, ask the operator for Emergency Parts Assistance, and provide the operator with
the required information. The operator will contact an appropriate individual to respond.
Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure
Returned equipment must have a Parts Request (PR) number. Obtain a PR number by
calling the Alcatel-Lucent Welcome Center at 1-866-582-3688.
No equipment should be returned without a PR number. The following information is
required:
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return
• Order number the equipment was purchased against and approximate date of purchase
Service center
The Service Center tests, repairs, and modifies all cards (both in and out of warranty).
Cards received for repair or modification are returned promptly.
Return for repair procedure
Refer to “Return for credit or warranty exchange procedure” (p. 2-4) for information on
obtaining a PR number. Notification to the Service Center and issuance of a PR number
by Alcatel-Lucent personnel must be made prior to shipment of parts. The following
information must be furnished with the request for return authorization:
• Purchase order number or requisition number
• Description and quantity of equipment to be returned
• Reason for return:
– Modification required
– Defective equipment to be repaired
• Warranty status (in or out of warranty) and warranty date stamped on unit
• Specific nature of problem
• Name and telephone number of person who identified problem
• Special instruction/information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Shipping instructions for repair, credit, or warranty exchange
Return equipment or parts prepaid to the address provided when the PR number was
issued. The PR number must be prominently marked on the shipping label, the packing
list, and any correspondence regarding the order.
• Include company name, address, and name of person to contact in case of a question.
• Include specific reason for return. (This aids prompt processing.)
• Include the same requisition number or purchase order number that was furnished
with request for return authorization.
• Include type number and part number of unit.
• State whether equipment is in or out of warranty.
• Furnish shipping address for return of unit, if applicable, or other pertinent details.
• Mail purchase order, if applicable, to address shown under Return for Repair
Procedure, Attention: Service Center.
Installation and maintenance services

Engineering and installation service
Whether installation for specific equipment or a full turnkey network facility is needed,
Installation Service can help. Alcatel-Lucent has experience in central office, outside
plant, and customer premises applications, and specializes in flexible scheduling and
high-quality service. Qualified staff are in place nationwide, so an installation can be
started and completed promptly.
Contract maintenance service
Field service from Alcatel-Lucent US and Canada offices are available. Alcatel-Lucent
field service is well-suited for private networks of any size.
Factory-trained service technicians are qualified on similar systems before they are
allowed to maintain customer equipment. They have direct access to additional technical
support around the clock and to all necessary tools and test equipment.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
3 3 aintenance and
M
trouble-clearing
procedures
Overview
Purpose
This chapter of the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) Maintenance and Trouble-Clearing
Guide contains the maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures for the system.
Contents
Alarm and event condition clearing procedures 3-4

Support procedures 3-25
Equipment replacement procedures 3-27
Supporting information 3-29
Preventive maintenance procedures 3-30
Procedure 3-1: Facility alarm or event 3-31
Procedure 3-2: CONTBUS 3-62
Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm) 3-65
Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP) 3-67
Procedure 3-5: FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-69
Procedure 3-6: HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-72
Procedure 3-7: HWCFGBUS alarm 3-76
Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL 3-77
Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm 3-79
Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-81
Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm 3-83
Procedure 3-12: LCASSEQ alarm 3-85
Procedure 3-13: MAN alarm (equipment) 3-86
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR 3-89

Procedure 3-15: PWR 3-91
Procedure 3-16: SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-95
Procedure 3-17: COM alarm or event 3-98
Procedure 3-18: MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-112
Procedure 3-19: INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-113
Procedure 3-20: LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, 3-116
MX320GA, MX640GA)
Procedure 3-21: LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-118
Procedure 3-22: STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA) 3-119
Procedure 3-23: HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN) 3-120
Procedure 3-24: SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC) 3-125
Procedure 3-25: Lamp test (RAU) 3-126
Procedure 3-26: MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA) 3-129
Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and replacement 3-130
Procedure 3-28: OC-n input/output card replacement 3-132
Procedure 3-29: XFP replacement 3-138
Procedure 3-30: SFP replacement 3-144
Procedure 3-31: FLCSERVA replacement 3-148
Procedure 3-32: FLCCONGI replacement 3-158
Procedure 3-33: MX320GA/MX640GA replacement 3-168
Procedure 3-34: PSF replacement 3-171
Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement 3-175
Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement 3-177
Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement 3-179
Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection 3-181
Procedure 3-39: 2-kW step-up converter replacement 3-183
Procedure 3-40: Clean fiber-optic connectors 3-187
Procedure 3-41: ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration 3-199
Procedure 3-42: ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration 3-202
Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement 3-206
Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement 3-208
Procedure 3-45: Gigabit Ethernet card replacement 3-210
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Overview
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-46: 2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter upgrade 3-214

Procedure 3-47: 2.2 kW step-up converter replacement 3-222
Procedure 3-48: 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement 3-226
Procedure 3-49: MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix upgrade procedure 3-230
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Alarm and event condition clearing procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm and event condition clearing procedures

Refer to Table 3-1, “Condition types” (p. 3-5) to identify a condition type and the
corresponding procedure, which describes how to clear the condition type. The
EQUIPMENT and FACILITY columns list the entities to which a condition type can
apply. Depending on the entities affected, some condition types have more than one
corresponding procedure.
In the EQUIPMENT column, entities are listed by software mnemonic. Refer to
“Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27) for corresponding hardware mnemonics.
In the FACILITY column also, entities are listed by software mnemonic. Observe the
following definitions:
• COM: Common condition type used in the system. No specific entity applies to this
condition type.
• ESLP: Ethernet Switch Logical Port
• GBE: Gigabit Ethernet
• GBE10: 10 Gigabit Ethernet
• OC3: OC-3
• OC12: OC-12
• OC48: OC-48
• OC192: OC-192
• STS1: STS-1 embedded in ESLP, GBE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, or VCG
• STS3C: STS-3C embedded in GBE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, or VCG
• STS12C: STS-12C embedded in OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192
• STS48C: STS-48C embedded in OC-48 or OC-192
• STS192C: STS-192C embedded in OC-192
• T3: T3 used for direct-mapped ethernet in ESLP
• VCG: Virtual Concatenation Group embedded in ESLP or GBE
The RTRV-ALM-ALL command is used to retrieve alarm condition types present in the
system.
The RTRV-COND-ALL command is used to retrieve event (alarmed, non-alarmed or
not-reported) condition types present in the system.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 Condition types
Condition Definition Equipment Facility Reference

ACTLPBK Loopback is activated GBE, Procedure 3-1:
at near end GBE10, OC3, “Facility alarm or
OC12, OC48, event” (p. 3-31)
OC192,
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C,
STS192C
AIS Incoming alarm OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
indication signal OC48, “Facility alarm or
OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
BITS, T3
AIS-P Path alarm indication STS1, Procedure 3-1:
signal STS3C, “Facility alarm or
STS12C, event” (p. 3-31)
STS48C,
STS192C
APSB Protection byte OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
failure has been OC48, “Facility alarm or
detected. (Applicable OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
to 1+1 bidirectional
FFP provisioned
facilities. Applies to
the protection OCn
facility.)
APSCDFLTK Incoming APS OC48, Procedure 3-1:
K-bytes detected OC192 “Facility alarm or
default code. event” (p. 3-31)
APSCIMP Incoming APS OC48, Procedure 3-1:
improper code. event” (p. 3-31)
APSCINCON Incoming APS OC48, Procedure 3-1:
inconsistent code. event” (p. 3-31)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-1 Condition types (continued)

APSCM APS channel match OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
failure detected OC48, “Facility alarm or
(Applicable to 1+1 OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
bidirectional FFP
provisioned facilities.
Applies to the
protection OCn
facility.)
APSCNMIS APS K-bytes detected OC48, Procedure 3-1:
node identifier OC192 “Facility alarm or
mismatch. event” (p. 3-31)
APSMM APS mode match OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
failure detected OC48, “Facility alarm or
(Applicable to 1+1 OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
bidirectional FFP
provisioned facilities.
Applies to the
protection OCn
facility.)
AUTOMAPINIT AUTO map COM Procedure 3-17:
initialization in “COM alarm or
process. event” (p. 3-98)
BLSRCOMMERR BLSR OC48, Procedure 3-1:
communication error. OC192 “Facility alarm or
Applies to both the event” (p. 3-31)
working and
protection OCn
facilities.
BLSRPROV BLSR provisioning OC48, Procedure 3-1:
alarm. Applicable to OC192 “Facility alarm or
automap generation, event” (p. 3-31)
occurs when the local
node is provisioned
for automap
generation and the
remote node is not.
Applies to both the
working and
protection OCn
facilities.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

CONTBUS Shelf controller is ES64SC, Procedure 3-2:
unreachable FLCCONGI, “CONTBUS”
FLCSERVA, (p. 3-62)
MX320GA,
MX640GA
DB-BACKUP Database backup is in COM Procedure 3-17:
process. “COM alarm or
event” (p. 3-98)
DB-RESTORE Database restore is in COM Procedure 3-17:
process. “COM alarm or
event” (p. 3-98)
DBF Database Backup COM Procedure 3-17:
failure, creation of “COM alarm or
local backup database event” (p. 3-98)
failed.
DRF Database restore COM Procedure 3-17:
failure, restoration of “COM alarm or
local backup database event” (p. 3-98)
failed.
DUPNODEID Duplicate node ID OC48, Procedure 3-1:
has been detected. OC192 “Facility alarm or
Applies to both the event” (p. 3-31)
working and
protection OCn
facilities.
EBER Excessive Bit Error OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
Rate OC48, “Facility alarm or
OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C,
STS192C
EOC Embedded operations OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
channel failure on OC48, “Facility alarm or
SECTION DCC. No OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
adjacencies formed.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

EOCL Embedded operations OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
channel failure on OC48, “Facility alarm or
line DCC. No OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
adjacencies formed.
FA Fuse alarm BUSTERM, Procedure 3-3: “FA
ES64SC, (Fuse alarm)”
FAN, (p. 3-65)
FLCCONGI,
FLCSERVA,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16GEFC,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P2S64X,
P2XGE,
P4S64X,
P8GEFC,
P8S16, PSF
FANEQPT Fan failure FAN, Procedure 3-4:
STEPUP “FANEQPT (FAN,
STEPUP)” (p. 3-67)
FEPRLF Far End Protection OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
Failure has been OC48, “Facility alarm or
detected. (Applicable OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
to 1+1 bidirectional
FFP provisioned
facilities. Applies to
the protection OCn
facility.)
FRNGSYNC CRG is in free MX320GA, Procedure 3-5:
running MX640GA “FRNGSYNC
synchronization mode (MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-69)
FRCDSWTOPRI Forced switch to COM Procedure 3-17:
primary reference has “COM alarm or
occurred event” (p. 3-98)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FRCDSWTOPRIOUT Forced switch to COM Procedure 3-17:
primary reference “COM alarm or
output has occurred event” (p. 3-98)
FRCDSWTOSEC Forced switch to COM Procedure 3-17:
secondary reference “COM alarm or
has occurred event” (p. 3-98)
FRCDSWTOSEC
OUT Forced switch to COM Procedure 3-17:
secondary reference “COM alarm or
output has occurred event” (p. 3-98)
FRCDWKSWBK Forced switch from OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
protection back to OC48, “Facility alarm or
working OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
FRCDWKSWBK-FE Forced switch from OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
protection back to OC48, “Facility alarm or
working due to OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
request from far end.
FRCDWKSWPR Forced switch from OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
working back to OC48, “Facility alarm or
protection OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
FRCDWKSWPR-FE Forced switch from OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
working back to OC48, “Facility alarm or
protection due to OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
FRCDWKSWPR-RING Forced ring switch, OC48, Procedure 3-1:
working to protect, OC192 “Facility alarm or
has occurred. event” (p. 3-31)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

FRCDWKSWPR- Forced ring switch, OC48, Procedure 3-1:
RING-FE working to protect, OC192 “Facility alarm or
has occurred due to event” (p. 3-31)
FULL-PASS Indicates the node is OC48, Procedure 3-1:
in full pass-through OC192 “Facility alarm or
state. event” (p. 3-31)
GFPCSF Client signal failure VCG Procedure 3-1:
on VCG. “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
GFPEXM Extension header VCG Procedure 3-1:
mismatch on VCG. “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
GFPLOF Loss of GFP VCG Procedure 3-1:
alignment on VCG. “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
GFPUPM User payload type VCG Procedure 3-1:
mismatch on VCG. “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
HITEMP1 System air FAN Procedure 3-23:
temperature exceeded “HITEMP1 or
the first threshold at HITEMP2 alarm
the lower fan unit and (FAN)” (p. 3-120)
the matrix card.
HITEMP2 System air FAN Procedure 3-23:
temperature exceeded “HITEMP1 or
the second threshold HITEMP2 alarm
at the lower fan unit (FAN)” (p. 3-120)
and the matrix card.
HLDOVRSYNC CRU is in holdover MX320GA, Procedure 3-6:
synchronization mode MX640GA “HLDOVRSYNC
(MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-72)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

HWCFGBUS HWCFG bus is not MX320GA, Procedure 3-7:
available at the MX640GA “HWCFGBUS
moment. No matrix alarm” (p. 3-76)
switch and no HW
configuration -
especially board
plug-in - should be
done.
HWFAIL Hardware error is BUSTERM, Procedure 3-8:
detected on a module ES64SC, “HWFAIL” (p. 3-77)
FAN,
FLCCONGI,
FLCSERVA,
MDL,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16GEFC,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P2S64X,
P2XGE,
P4S64X,
P8S16,
P8GEFC,
PSF, SFP,
XFP
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

IMPROPRMVL Physical removal was BUSTERM, Procedure 3-9:
performed on an ES64SC, “IMPROPRMVL
equipment module FAN, alarm” (p. 3-79)
without logically FLCCONGI,
removing it first FLCSERVA,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16GEFC,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P2S64X,
P2XGE,
P4S64X,
P8GEFC,
P8S16, PSF,
SFP, XFP
INHSWDX Duplex (redundant) ES64SC, Procedure 3-10:
module is inhibited MX320GA, “INHSWDX
from copy switching MX640GA (ES64SC,
MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-81)
INIT Initialization, COM Procedure 3-17:
indicates that system “COM alarm or
initialization is event” (p. 3-98)
currently in progress.
INTERR Indicates a hardware ES64SC, Procedure 3-19:
defect on I/O card or MX320GA, “INTERR alarm
Matrix card that MX640GA (ES64SC,
affects the signal MX320GA,
path. MX640GA)”
(p. 3-113)
ISPBUS ISPB bus is not ES64SC, Procedure 3-11:
working or working MX320GA, “ISPBUS alarm”
incorrectly. Matrix MX640GA (p. 3-83)
switch/EPS is
blocked, maintenance
actions should be
avoided.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

ISD Idle Signal Detected T3 Procedure 3-1:
(ACT or BUSY or “Facility alarm or
TRM) event” (p. 3-31)
KBYTE-PASS Indicates the node is OC48, Procedure 3-1:
in K-byte OC192 “Facility alarm or
pass-through state. event” (p. 3-31)
L2LCONFAIL Layer 2 Line DCC OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
connection failure. OC48, “Facility alarm or
Line DCC can not OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
communicate with
far-end Line DCC
due to data link
connection problems.
This alarm is
detectable when
L2SIDE=USER.
L2SCONFAIL Layer 2 Section DCC OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
connection failure. OC48, “Facility alarm or
Section DCC can not OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
communicate with
far-end Section DCC
due to data link
connection problems.
This alarm is
detectable when
L2SIDE=USER.
LAMP TEST Office status alarm RAU Procedure 3-25:
LEDs failed lamp test “Lamp test (RAU)”
on RAU. (p. 3-126)
LANDEGR LAN redundancy is ES64SC, Procedure 3-20:
degraded. The FLCCONGI, “LANDEGR alarm
internal LAN FLCSERVA, (ES64SC,
connections from the MX320GA, FLCCONGI,
active FLC to the MX640GA FLCSERVA,
alarmed equipment is MX320GA,
no longer redundant. MX640GA)”
The FLC is not (p. 3-116)
connected to the
external LAN.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LCASSEQ LCAS sequence ES64SC, Procedure 3-12:
numbering is P2XGE “LCASSEQ alarm”
corrupted for at least (p. 3-85)
one LCAS group on
the card.
LOCKOUTOFPR Lockout of protection OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
facility OC48, “Facility alarm or
OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
LOCKOUTOFPR-FE Lockout of protection OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
facility due to a OC48, “Facility alarm or
request from the far OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
end.
LOCKOUTOPS Lockout of protection OC48, Procedure 3-1:
span OC192 “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
LOCKOUTOFPS-FE Lockout of protection OC48, Procedure 3-1:
span due to request OC192 “Facility alarm or
from far end. event” (p. 3-31)
LOCKOUTWR Lockout of working OC48, Procedure 3-1:
span OC192 “Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
LOF Loss of frame BITS, OC3, Procedure 3-1:
OC12, OC48, “Facility alarm or
OC192, T3 event” (p. 3-31)
LOL Loss of Link, GBE GBE Procedure 3-1:
“Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
LOP-P Loss of pointer, path STS1, Procedure 3-1:
STS3C, “Facility alarm or
STS48C,
STS192C
LOS Loss of signal BITS, GBE, Procedure 3-1:
GBE10, OC3, “Facility alarm or
OC12, OC48, event” (p. 3-31)
OC192
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

LSSC The subsystem ES64SC, Procedure 3-21:
controlled by the MX320GA, “LSSC alarm
equipment cannot be MX640GA (ES64SC,
provisioned or MX320GA,
supervised at the MX640GA)”
moment. (p. 3-118)
MAN Manually taken out of BITS, GBE, Procedure 3-1:
service GBE10, OC3, “Facility alarm or
OC12, OC48, event” (p. 3-31)
OC192,
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C,
STS192C,
T3, VCG
MAN Logical removal BUSTERM, Procedure 3-13:
performed on module ES64SC, “MAN alarm
FAN, (equipment)”
FLCCONGI, (p. 3-86)
FLCSERVA,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P16GEFC,
P2S64X,
P2XGE,
P4S64X,
P8S16,
P8GEFC,
PSF, SFP,
STEPUP,
XFP
MANSWTOINT Indicates that a COM Procedure 3-17:
manual switch to “COM alarm or
internal timing has event” (p. 3-98)
occurred.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MANSWTOPRI Indicates that a COM Procedure 3-17:
manual switch to the “COM alarm or
primary reference has event” (p. 3-98)
occurred.
MANSWTOPRIOUT Indicates that a COM Procedure 3-17:
primary reference event” (p. 3-98)
output has occurred.
MANSWTOSEC Indicates that a COM Procedure 3-17:
secondary reference event” (p. 3-98)
has occurred.
MANSWTOSECOUT Indicates that a COM Procedure 3-17:
secondary reference event” (p. 3-98)
output has occurred.
MANWKSWBK Manual switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
service from OC48, “Facility alarm or
protection back to OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
working STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
MANWKSWBK-FE Manual switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
protection back to OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
working due to a
request from the far
end.
MANWKSWPR Manual switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
service from working OC48, “Facility alarm or
to protection OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MANWKSWPR-FE Manual switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
to protect due to a OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
end.
MANWKSWPR-RING Manual ring switch of OC48, Procedure 3-1:
service from working OC192 “Facility alarm or
to protect. event” (p. 3-31)
MANWKSWPR-RING-FE Manual ring switch of OC48, Procedure 3-1:
service from working OC192 “Facility alarm or
to protection due to a event” (p. 3-31)
end.
MISC-1 Slave CRU is not MX320GA, Procedure 3-18:
tracking master CRU. MX640GA “MISC-1
(MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-112)
MXUPGRD Matrix upgrade MX320GA, Procedure 3-26:
in-process. MX640GA “MXUPGRD
(MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-129)
NTPOOSYNC No NTP server is COM Procedure 3-17:
selected. “COM alarm or
event” (p. 3-98)
PLM-P Payload label ESLPSTS1, Procedure 3-1:
mismatch - Path ESLPSTS3C, “Facility alarm or
ESLPSTS12C event” (p. 3-31)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

PRCDRERR Procedure error. Card BUSTERM, Procedure 3-14:
is inserted in wrong ES64SC, “PRCDRERR”
slot. FAN, (p. 3-89)
FLCCONGI,
FLCSERVA,
MDL,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16GEFC,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P2S64X,
P2XGE,
P4S64X,
P8GEFC,
P8S16, PSF,
SFP, XFP
PWR Power supply error PSF, FLC, Procedure 3-15:
MX640GA, “PWR” (p. 3-91)
MX320GA,
FAN,
P4S64X,
P2S64X,
P16S16,
P8S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P16GE,
P8GE
RAI RAI failure T3 Procedure 3-1:
“Facility alarm or
event” (p. 3-31)
RFI Remote failure OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
indication OC48, “Facility alarm or
OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C,
STS192C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

RINGMAPPROV Ring map provision OC48, Procedure 3-1:
error. Applicable OC192 “Facility alarm or
when automap is event” (p. 3-31)
enabled, indication of
a communication
problem around the
ring in both/either
direction.
RING-SQLCH Ring Squelch, OC48, Procedure 3-1:
indicates the optical OC192 “Facility alarm or
facility is squelching event” (p. 3-31)
traffic.
ROLLMON Roll Monitoring, STS1, Procedure 3-1:
receive-side of the STS3C, “Facility alarm or
new port being STS12C, event” (p. 3-31)
monitored for valid STS48C,
signal. STS192C
SDBER Bit Error Rate greater OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
than or equal to OC48, “Facility alarm or
provisioned threshold OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C,
STS192C
SLTMSIG CRU has detected COM Procedure 3-17:
that an external “COM alarm or
reference frequency event” (p. 3-98)
has moved off the
required accuracy
limits.
SNMPLINKFAIL SNMP and CLI ES64SC Procedure 3-24:
management interface “SNMPLINKFAIL
lost communication (ES64SC)” (p. 3-125)
with the FLC.
SSMINVAL No valid sync COM Procedure 3-17:
message detected for “COM alarm or
more than 10 event” (p. 3-98)
seconds.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SSMLOWQ Indicates the SSM COM Procedure 3-17:
reference quality “COM alarm or
received is lower than event” (p. 3-98)
the expected system
quality.
STBYDBC The primary backup FLCCONGI, Procedure 3-22:
database copy on the FLCSERVA “STBYDBC alarm
standby FLC is (FLCCONGI,
corrupted. FLC FLCSERVA)”
protection switching (p. 3-119)
is inhibited.
SWDWN Module is being ES64SC, No action
downloaded with FLCCONGI,
software FLCSERVA,
MDL,
MX320GA,
MX640GA,
P16S16,
P16S1S,
P16S1S4,
P16GEFC,
P2XGE,
P2S64X,
P4S64X,
P8S16,
P8GEFC
SYNCEQPT Equipment failure of MX320GA, Procedure 3-16:
both CRUs MX640GA “SYNCEQPT
(MX320GA,
MX640GA)”
(p. 3-95)
SYNCOOS The Primary and COM Procedure 3-17:
Secondary external “COM alarm or
reference has failed event” (p. 3-98)
(on both CRUs) and
the system is going
into holdover.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

SYNCOUTPRI The reference for COM Procedure 3-17:
outgoing DS1 with “COM alarm or
highest event” (p. 3-98)
priority/quality has
failed on at least one
CRU.
SYNCOUTSEC The reference for COM Procedure 3-17:
outgoing DS1 with “COM alarm or
highest event” (p. 3-98)
priority/quality has
not failed while at
least one other
provisioned reference
has failed on one
CRU.
SYNCPRI The reference with COM Procedure 3-17:
highest “COM alarm or
priority/quality has event” (p. 3-98)
failed on at least one
CRU while at least
one other provisioned
reference has not
failed.
SYNCSEC The reference with COM Procedure 3-17:
highest “COM alarm or
priority/quality has event” (p. 3-98)
not failed while at
least one other
provisioned reference
has failed on one
CRU.
UNEQ-P Idle signal STS1, Procedure 3-1:
(unequipped), path STS3C, “Facility alarm or
STS48C,
STS192C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VCGLOA Loss of Alignment on VCG Procedure 3-1:
the VCG while one or “Facility alarm or
more of its members event” (p. 3-31)
are cross-connected
(ACT/BUSY) and
enabled to carry
traffic (VCACT).
Always service
affecting.
VCGLPF LCAS protocol VCG Procedure 3-1:
failure on the VCG. “Facility alarm or
Always Service event” (p. 3-31)
Affecting.
VCGPLC Partial Loss of VCG Procedure 3-1:
Capacity on the VCG. “Facility alarm or
Always non-service event” (p. 3-31)
affecting. Only with
LCAS enabled.
VCGPLM Payload type VCG Procedure 3-1:
Mismatch on the “Facility alarm or
VCG. Always Service event” (p. 3-31)
affecting. Only for
GBEVCG.
VCGRFI Remote failure VCG Procedure 3-1:
indication on the “Facility alarm or
VCG. Always event” (p. 3-31)
non-service affecting.
Only with LCAS
enabled.
VCGSSF Server Signal Failure VCG Procedure 3-1:
on the VCG while “Facility alarm or
one or more of its event” (p. 3-31)
members are cross
connected
(ACT/BUSY) and
enabled (VCACT)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

VCLOM Loss of Muliframe on STS1, STS3C Procedure 3-1:
the path facility that “Facility alarm or
is a member of a event” (p. 3-31)
VCG. Always
VCMND The differential delay STS1, STS3C Procedure 3-1:
on a path facility that “Facility alarm or
is a member of a event” (p. 3-31)
VCG cannot be
compensated. Always
VCSQM Sequence Number STS1, STS3C Procedure 3-1:
Mismatch on a path “Facility alarm or
facility that is a event” (p. 3-31)
member of a VCG.
Always non-service
affecting.
WKSWBK Automatic switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
protection back to OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
working facility STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
WKSWBK-FE Automatic switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
protection back to OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
working facility due
to a request from the
far end.
WKSWPR Automatic switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
to protection facility. OC192, event” (p. 3-31)
STS1,
STS3C,
STS12C,
STS48C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WKSWPR-FE Automatic switch of OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
to protection facility OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
due to a request from
the far end.
WKSWPR-RING Automatic ring OC48, Procedure 3-1:
switch of service OC192 “Facility alarm or
from working to event” (p. 3-31)
protection facility.
WKSWPR-RING-FE Automatic ring OC48, Procedure 3-1:
switch of service OC192 “Facility alarm or
from working to event” (p. 3-31)
protection facility due
to a request from the
far end.
WTR Wait to Restore. Set STS1, Procedure 3-1:
on preferred path of a STS3C, “Facility alarm or
UPSR when STS12C, event” (p. 3-31)
switching is revertive STS48C
and alarms have
cleared on preferred
and the Wait to
Restore to Preferred
period is in effect.
WTR-FE Wait to Restore, far OC3, OC12, Procedure 3-1:
end. Set due to OC48, “Facility alarm or
request from the far OC192 event” (p. 3-31)
end.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Support procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Support procedures
Refer to Table 3-2, “Support procedures” (p. 3-25) to select the support procedure needed
to perform maintenance and trouble clearing on the system.
For references to the TL1 Command Guide, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
For references to the TL1 User Provisioning Guide, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide.
Table 3-2 Support procedures
Support procedure Reference

Alarm attributes, retrieve or set TL1 Command Guide
Alarm and event reports, retrieve TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Alarm cut-off control TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Clean fiber-optic connectors Procedure 3-40: “Clean
fiber-optic connectors”
(p. 3-187)
Clock reference and operation mode selections TL1 Command Guide
Lamp test, RAU TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Log into system TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Loopback (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, TL1 User Provisioning Guide
STS12C, STS48C, STS192C)
Manage cross-connections TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Matrix Upgrade Procedure, MX320GA to MX640GA Procedure 3-49: “MX320GA to
In-Service MX640GA in-service matrix
upgrade procedure” (p. 3-230)
Password change 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
Performance monitoring 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
Protection switching controls 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
Provision equipment 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
Provision or edit ports 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
Routine task procedures “Preventive maintenance
procedures” (p. 3-30)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Support procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-2 Support procedures (continued)
Support procedure Reference

Test access 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Equipment replacement procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Equipment replacement procedures

Refer to Table 3-3, “Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27) to find the procedure
for replacing or adding each 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) replaceable unit.
Table 3-3 Equipment replacement procedures
Equipment Procedure
2 kW step-up converter replacement Procedure 3-39: “2-kW step-up converter
replacement” (p. 3-183)
2 kW to 2.2 kW step-up converter upgrade Procedure 3-46: “2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter
upgrade” (p. 3-214)
2.2 kW step-up converter replacement Procedure 3-47: “2.2 kW step-up converter
10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement Procedure 3-48: “ 10 Gigabit Ethernet card
BUSTERM replacement Procedure 3-36: “BUSTERM replacement” (p. 3-177)
BYPASS replacement Procedure 3-44: “BYPASS replacement” (p. 3-208)
ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration Procedure 3-41: “ES64SC replacement in a protected
configuration” (p. 3-199)
ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration Procedure 3-42: “ES64SC replacement in an
unprotected configuration” (p. 3-202)
FAN dust filter replacement Procedure 3-37: “FAN dust filter replacement”
(p. 3-179)
FAN replacement Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement” (p. 3-175)
FLCCONGI replacement Procedure 3-32: “FLCCONGI replacement”
(p. 3-158)
FLCSERVA replacement Procedure 3-31: “FLCSERVA replacement” (p. 3-148)
Gigabit Ethernet Card replacement Procedure 3-45: “Gigabit Ethernet card replacement”
(p. 3-210)
Input/output Card replacement Procedure 3-28: “OC-n input/output card
Module mechanical removal and replacement Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and
MX320GA/MX640GA replacement Procedure 3-33: “MX320GA/MX640GA
PSF replacement Procedure 3-34: “PSF replacement” (p. 3-171)
RAU replacement Procedure 3-43: “RAU replacement” (p. 3-206)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Equipment replacement procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-3 Equipment replacement procedures (continued)
Equipment Procedure
SFP replacement Procedure 3-30: “SFP replacement” (p. 3-144)
2 kW step-up converter replacement Procedure 3-39: “2-kW step-up converter
2 kW to 2.2 kW step-up converter upgrade Procedure 3-46: “2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter
upgrade” (p. 3-214)
2.2 kW step-up converter replacement Procedure 3-47: “2.2 kW step-up converter
XFP replacement Procedure 3-29: “XFP replacement” (p. 3-138)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Supporting information
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Supporting information
Refer to Table 3-4, “Supporting information” (p. 3-29) for supporting information needed
to perform maintenance and trouble clearing on the system. The following references are
used:
• For references to the TL1 Command Guide, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command
Guide.
• For references to the TL1 User Provisioning Guide, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 User
Provisioning Guide.
• For references to the Installation and System Turn-up Guide, refer to the 1678 MCC
Installation and System Turn-up Guide .
Table 3-4 Supporting information
Supporting information Reference

Alarm condition types TL1 Command Guide
Circuit card locator and addressing Installation and System Turn-up Guide
Command structure and response messages TL1 Command Guide
Product support information “Product support information” (p. 2-1)
Electrostatic-sensitive devices “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17)
Error codes TL1 Command Guide
How to use TOP documentation “About this document”
Laser precautions
Maintenance philosophy “About this document”
Operations support system TL1 User Provisioning Guide
Safety awareness “Safety awareness” (p. 1-3)
Security/user authorization TL1 User Provisioning Guide
State event tables TL1 Command Guide
Test access TL1 User Provisioning Guide
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Preventive maintenance procedures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Preventive maintenance procedures

Refer to Table 3-5, “Preventive maintenance procedures” (p. 3-30) for preventive
maintenance procedures and their corresponding references. Frequencies listed are
recommended. Local conditions may require maintenance procedures be performed more
or less frequently.
Table 3-5 Preventive maintenance procedures
Activity Frequency Reference

Replace FAN unit Every 2 years Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement”
(p. 3-175)
Clean FAN unit protection Every 3 months Procedure 3-38: “Clean FAN unit
protection” (p. 3-181)
Replace FAN unit dust filter Every 3 months Procedure 3-37: “FAN dust filter
Check FAN unit dust filter Monthly Procedure 3-37: “FAN dust filter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-1: Facility alarm or event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-1: Facility alarm or event

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to identify and clear a facility alarm or event.
Related information
Refer to the 1678 MCC Installation and System Turn-up Guide to determine module
location and address. For information on TL1 command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
Complete the following steps.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL; and observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Select alarm to clear and proceed to correct step. Refer to Table 3-6, “Facility
alarms/conditions” (p. 3-31).
Table 3-6 Facility alarms/conditions
Alarm/condition Facility type Go to Step

ACTLPBK GBE, GBE10, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, Step 3
STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C
AIS BITS, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, T3 Step 6
AIS-P STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C Step 7
APSB OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 8
APSCDFLTK OC48, OC192 Step 23
APSCIMP OC48, OC192 Step 25
APSCINCON OC48, OC192 Step 27
APSCM OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 28
APSCNMIS OC48, OC192 Step 51
APSMM OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 28
BLSRCOMMERR OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 61
BLSRPROV OC48, OC192 Step 62
DUBNODEI OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 28
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-6 Facility alarms/conditions (continued)

EBER OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 75
STS48C, STS192C
EOC OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 76
EOCL OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 76
FEPRLF OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 77
FRCDWKSWBK OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 80
STS48C
FRCDWKSWBK-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 84
FRCDWKSWPR OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 80
STS48C
FRCDWKSWPR-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 84
FRCDWKSWPRRING OC48, OC192 Step 88
FRCDWKSWPRRING- OC48, OC192 Step 92
FE
FULL-PASS OC48, OC192 Step 96
GFPCSF VCG Step 97
GFPEXM VCG Step 98
GFPLOF VCG Step 99
GFPUPM VCG Step 109
ISD T3 Step 110
KBYTE-PASS OC48, OC192 Step 111
L2LCONFAIL OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 112
L2SCONFAIL OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 112
LOCKOUTOFPR OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 113
LOCKOUTOFPR-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 117
LOCKOUTOPS OC48, OC192 Step 121
LOCKOUTOPS-FE OC48, OC192 Step 125
LOCKOUTWR OC48, OC192 Step 129
LOF BITS, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, T3 Step 133
LOL GBE Step 134
LOP-P STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C Step 138
LOS BITS, GBE, GBE10,OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 139
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

MAN BITS, GBE,GBE10, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, Step 140
STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C, T3,
VCG
MANWKSWBK OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 143
STS48C
MANWKSWBK-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 147
MANWKSWPR OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 143
STS48C
MANWKSWPR-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 147
MANWKSWPRRING OC48, OC192 Step 151
MANWKSWPRRING- OC48, OC192 Step 155
FE
PLM-P ESLPSTS1, ESLPSTS3C, ESLPSTS12C Step 159
RAI T3 Step 168
RINGMAPPROV OC48, OC192 Step 169
RING-SQLCH OC48, OC192 Step 170
RFI OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 171
STS48C, STS192C
ROLLMON STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C Step 172
SDBER OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 173
STS48C, STS192C
UNEQ-P STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C, STS192C Step 174
VCGLOA VCG Step 176
VCGLPF VCG Step 178
VCGPLC VCG Step 180
VCGPLM VCG Step 182
VCGRFI VCG Step 184
VCGSSF VCG Step 186
VCLOM STS1, STS3C Step 189
VCMND STS1, STS3C Step 191
VCSQM STS1, STS3C Step 193
WKSWBK OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 195
STS48C
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................

WKSWBK-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 197
WKSWPR OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, Step 196
STS48C
WKSWPR-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 198
WKSWPRRING OC48, OC192 Step 199
WKSWPRRING- FE OC48, OC192 Step 200
WTR STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C Step 201
WTR-FE OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192 Step 202
None of the above “Alarm and
event
condition
clearing
procedures”
(p. 3-4)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 ACTLPBK
ACTLPBK indicates signal in loopback. Does loopback need to be released?
If yes, go to Step 4.
If no, go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter RLS-LPBK-x::AID;
where:
x = Facility type (GBE, GBE10, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C,
STS48C, STS192C)
AID = Facility Access Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did output return a COMPLD or DENY?

If COMPLD, go to Step 204.
If DENY, go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 AIS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AIS is an alarm indication signal on incoming BITS, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, or
T3.
Problem is upstream. Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 AIS-P
AIS-P is an alarm indication signal on incoming STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C,
STS-192C.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 NOTICE
Service-disruption hazard
Possibility of service interruption.
Follow procedure in Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and replacement”
(p. 3-130) when replacing a module to avoid service interruption.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve alarms at far end.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Are there any OC-n alarms?

If yes, clear alarms. Go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; to retrieve alarms at near end.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Are there any OCn card alarms?

If yes, clear alarms. Go to-“Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID; for facility in alarm.

where:
OCn = Optical facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, or OC192)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Observe output and note primary and secondary states.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Does the alarmed OC-n facility have secondary state of WRK or STBYH?
If WRK, go to Step 16.
If STBYH, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; to switch service away from alarmed facility.

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Repeat Step 13 through Step 16 at far-end NE that terminates alarmed OC-n span to
switch active side away from alarmed facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Refer to-Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and replacement” (p. 3-130) to
replace OC-n card, then go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Was a protection switch performed on OC-n facility at near end or far end?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; to release protection switch at near end and/or far end.
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Did alarm clear?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 APSCDFLTK
APSCDFLTK indicates incoming APS K-byte received is a a default code. This alarm is
transmitted until a valid ring map is created. While this alarm is present, no BLSR
protection is available.
Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide to provision ring map.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 APSCIMP
APSCIMP indicates the incoming APS K-byte detected improper code.
Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL;.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Are there other OC-48 or OC-192 facility alarms?

If yes, clear alarms. Go to Step 2 and clear these alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 APSCINCON
APSCINCON indicates incoming APS K-byte detected an inconsistent code.
Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide to provision ring map.
Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 APSCM or APSMM
APSCM indicates automatic protection switching channel match failure. APSMM
indicates automatic protection switching mode match failure.
Enter RTRV-FFP-OCn::AID; to check provisioning of protection switching parameters
at both ends of alarmed OC-n span.
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Observe output. Are parameters same at both ends?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Enter ED-FFP-OCn::PROTECTEDID,PROTECTINGID::::PSDIRN=a,RVRTV=b; to
change protection switching parameters at incorrect end.
where:
PROTECTED_ID = AID of working OC-n in 1+1 FFP group, working (preferred) OC-n in
Linear group, or west OC-n in UPSR
PROTECTING_ID = AID of protecting OC-n in 1+1 FFP group, protecting (alternate)
OC-n in Linear group, or east OC-n in UPSR
a = UNI (Unidirectional), or BI (Bidirectional)
b =N (for PTYPE=Linear, otherwise no value)
Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on parameter values.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Did alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL; at near-end NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Observe output. Note AID in alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID; for facility in alarm.

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; to switch service away from alarmed facility.

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL; at far-end NE.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Observe output. Note AID in alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID; for facility in alarm (far-end).

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; to switch service away from alarmed facility

at far-end.
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 NOTICE
Possibility of service interruption.
Follow Procedure 3-28: “OC-n input/output card replacement” (p. 3-132) when
replacing a card to avoid interrupting service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46 Replace OC-n card. Refer to Procedure 3-28: “OC-n input/output card replacement”
(p. 3-132). Then go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Was a protection switch performed on OC-n facility at near-end or far-end?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; to release protection switch at near end and/or far end.
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50 Did alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 APSCNMIS
APSCNMIS indicates APS K-byte detected node ID mismatched in a BLSR ring.
Enter RTRV-FFP-OCn::[AID];
where:
OCn=Optical facility type (OC-48 or OC-192)
AID=OC-48/OC-192 access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52 Observe output and note current value of NODEID parameter.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOP-S;
where:
OCn=Optical facility (OC-48 or OC-192)
AID=East OC-n facility access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
54 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOP-S;
where:
AID=West OC-n facility access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
55 Enter ED-FFP-OCn::PROTECTED_ID::::NODEID=;
where:
PROTECTED_ID=OC-48/OC-192 access identifier
NODEID=New value of node identifier (0-15)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
56 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOP-S;
where:
AID=West OC-n facility access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
57 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOP-S;
where:
AID=East OC-n facility access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
58 Enter RTRV-FFP-OCn::[AID]; to verify new node ID value.

where:
AID=OC-48/OC192 access identifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
59 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL; and observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
60 Did APSCNMIS condition clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
61 BLASRCOMMERR
BLASRCOMMERR indicates the local node is unable to communicate around the
network in either one direction or in both directions. This is an indication of a DCC
problem.
Problem is outside of local system. Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
62 BLSRPROV
BLSRPROV indicates the local node is provisioned for automap generation and one or
more remote nodes within the BLSR network is not provisioned for automap generation.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
63 Verify automap generation is the correct provisioning for the BLSR network.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
64 Is automap generation the desired provisioning for the BLSR network?

If yes, go to Step 65 and verify all nodes are provisioned for AUTOMAP to Y.
If no, go to Step 65 and verify all nodes are provisioned for AUTOMAP to N.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
65 Enter the following command to verify provisioning at each node within the BLSR
network. RTRV-FFP-OCn:TID;
where:
TID=OC-48/OC192 target node access identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
66 Is automap configured correctly?

If yes, go to Step 65 and verify the next node in the BLSR network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
67 Enter the following command to set automap to correct value:

ED-FFP-OCn:TID:::::AUTOMAP=x;
where:
x=AUTOMAP (N or Y)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
68 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; and observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
69 Did BLSRPROV condition clear?

If no, go to Step 65 and verify the next node in the BLSR network..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
70 DUBNODEID
DUBNODEID indicates multiple nodes within the BLSR network are provisioned with
the same node ID.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
71 Enter the following command to verify node ID provisioning at each node within the
BLSR network. RTRV-FFP-OCn:TID;
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
72 For each node with a duplicate node ID enter the following command to correct the
nodeID: ED-FFP-OCn:TID:::::NODEID=x;
where:
x=node ID
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
73 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL; and observe output.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
74 Did DUBNODEID condition clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
75 EBER
EBER indicates Bit Error Rate (BER) exceeds provisioned Signal Degrade Threshold
(SDTH) on one of the following facilities: OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS1, STS3C,
STS12C, STS48C, or STS192C. Problem can be caused by incoming facility, dirty or bad
fiber connector, or by degeneration of receive diode in OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192
module.
Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
76 EOC or EOCL
EOC indicates Embedded.Operations Channel failure on section DCC and no adjacencies
are formed. EOCL indicates Embedded.Operations Channel failure on line DCC and no
adjacencies are formed.
Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
77 FEPRLF
FEPRLF indicates far end protection failure on one of the following ports: OC-3, OC-12,
OC-48, or OC-192. This failure is applicable to 1+1 bidirectional FFP provisioned
facilities. It applies to the protection OC-n facility.
Check far end OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, and OC-192 provisioning.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
78 Correct provisioning if necessary. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
79 Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
80 FRCDWKSWBK or FRCDWKSWPR
FRCDWKSWBK indicates forced switch of service from protect to working.
FRCDWKSWPR indicates forced switch of service from working to protect. This
condition is a result of the OPR-PROTNSW-x (x = OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1,
STS3C, STS12C, or STS48C) command.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
81 Is forced switch to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
82 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-x::AID;
where:
x = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, STS48C)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
84 FRCDWKSWBK-FE or FRCDWKSWPR-FE
FRCDWKSWBK-FE indicates forced switch of service from protect to working at the far
end. FRCDWKSWPR-FE indicates forced switch of service from working to protect at
the far end. This condition is a result of the OPR-PROTNSW-OCn (n = 3, 12, 48, or 192)
command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
85 Is forced switch to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
86 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID;
where:
OCn = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, or OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
88 FRCDWKSWPR-RING
FRCDWKSWPR-RING indicates forced ring switch of service from working to protect.
This condition is a result of the OPR-PROTNSW-x (x=OC48, OC192) command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
89 Is forced ring switch to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
90 90 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-x::AID;
where:
x=Facility type (OC48 or OC192)
AID=Facility Access Identifier
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
92 FRCDWKSWPR-RING-FE
FRCDWKSWPR-RING-FE indicates forced ring switch of service from working to
protect at the far end. This condition is a result of the OPR-PROTNSW-OCn (n=48, or
192) command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
93 Is forced ring switch to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
OCn=Facility type (OC48 or OC192)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
96 FULL-PASS
FULL-PASS indicates the node is in a full pass through state due to a ring switch on a
non adjacent span on the BLSR network.
Problem is unrelated to the alarming node. Resolve all conditions which generated the
ring switch on the BLSR network. Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
97 GFPCSF
GFPCSF indicates client signal failure on VCG facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
98 GFPEXM
GFPEXM indicates extension header mismatch on VCG facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
99 GFPLOF
GFPLOF indicates loss of GFP alignment on VCG facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
100 Is upstream system 1678 MCC?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
101 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; and RTRV-COND-ALL; at both NEs associated with VCG
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
102 Observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
103 Any equipment alarms/conditions associated with VCG facility with GFPLOF?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
104 Clear equipment alarms/conditions associated with VCG facility. Refer to “Alarm and
event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
106 Observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
107 Did alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
108 Verify upstream VCG facility compatibility to the 1678 MCC. Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
109 GFPUPM
GFPUPM indicates user payload type mismatch on VCG facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
110 ISD
ISD indicates idle signal detected on T3 facility.
Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
111 KBYTE-PASS
KBYTE-PASS indicates the node is in a K-byte pass through state due to a lockout of
protect and ring exerciser associated with a non adjacent span on the BLSR network.
Problem is unrelated to the alarming node. Resolve lockout of protect conditions
associated with a non adjacent span on the BLSR network. Go to Step 204..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
112 L2LCONFAIL or L2SCONFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L2LCONFAIL indicates Layer 2 Line DCC connection failure. L2SCONFAIL indicates
Layer 2 Section DCC connection failure.
Go to Step 203.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
113 LOCKOUTOFPR
LOCKOUTOFPR indicates lockout of a protection OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192
facility. The protect facility is locked out of use by any associated working facility. This
condition is initiated by OPR-PROTNSW-x command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
114 Is lockout of protection to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
115 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-x::AID ;

where:
x = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
116 Did output return COMPLD or DENY?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
117 LOCKOUTOFPR-FE
LOCKOUTOFPR-FE indicates lockout of a protection OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192
far end facility. The protect facility is locked out of use by any associated working
facility. This condition is initiated by OPR-PROTNSW-x command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
118 Is lockout of protection to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
OCn = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
121 LOCKOUTOPS
LOCKOUTOPS indicates lockout of a protection span OC-48 or OC-192 facility. The
protect facility is locked out of use by any associated working facility. This condition is
initiated by OPR-PROTNSW-x command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
122 Is lockout of protection span to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
123 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-x::AID:::LOW-S;

where:
x=Facility type (OC48 or OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
125 LOCKOUTOPS-FE
LOCKOUTOPS-FE indicates lockout of a protection span OC-48 or OC-192 far end
facility. The protect facility is locked out of use by any associated working facility. This
condition is initiated by OPR-PROTNSW-x command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
127 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOW-S

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
129 LOCKOUTOFWR
LOCKOUTOFWR indicates lockout of a working span OC-48, or OC-192 facility. The
working facility is locked out of use by any associated protection facility. This condition
is initiated by OPR-PROTNSW-x command.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
131 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::LOW-S

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
133 LOF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LOF indicates loss of frame on incoming BITS, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 facility.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
134 LOL
LOL indicates loss of link on GBE facility.
Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
135 Are there any VCG alarms?

If yes, clear VCG alarms first. Go to Step 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
136 Verify auto negotiation is turned ON on far end.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
137 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
138 LOP-P
LOP-P indicates loss of pointer on path (STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C, STS-192C)
facility. Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
139 LOS
LOS indicates loss of signal on BITS, GBE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 facility.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
140 MAN
MAN indicates that BITS, GBE, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1, STS-3C,
STS-12C, STS-48C, STS-192C, T3, or VCG has been manually taken out of service.
Is port ready to be provisioned back in service?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
141 Enter RST-x::AID;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where x=Facility type (BITS, GBE, OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C,
STS48C, STS192C, T3, VCG)
AID = Facility Access Identifier of port with MAN alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
143 MANWKSWBK or MANWKSWPR

MANWKSWBK indicates manual switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1,
STS-3C, STS-12C, or STS-48C facility from protect to working. MANWKSWPR
indicates manual switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, or
STS-48C facility from working to protect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
144 Is manual switch to be released?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

where:
x = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, or STS48C)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
147 MANWKSWBK-FE or MANWKSWPR-FE

MANWKSWBK-FE indicates manual switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192
facility from protect to working at the far end. MANWKSWPR-FE indicates manual
switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 facility from working to protect at the far end.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

where:
OCn = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
151 MANWKSWPR-RING
MANWKSWPR-RING indicates manual ring switch of OC-48 or OC-192 facility from
working to protect.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

where:
x = Facility type (OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
155 MANWKSWPR-RING-FE
MANWKSWPR-RING-FE indicates manual ring switch of OC-48 or OC-192 facility
from working to protect at the far end.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

where:
OCn = Facility type (OC48 or OC192)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
159 PLM-P
PLM-P is path payload label mismatch for ESLPSTS1, ESLPSTS3C, or ESLPSTS12C
facility.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
160 Determine desired ESLP port type.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
161 Enter RTRV-ESLP::AID;

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
162 Observe output.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
163 Did returned ESLP port type match desired ESLP port type?
If yes, problem is outside of local system. Go to Step 204.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
164 Enter DLT-ESLP::AID;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
165 Enter ENT-ESLP::AID::::ESLPTYPE=a;

where:
a = T3 (port is DS-3 contained in a STS-1), STS3C (port is a STS-3C), or STS12C (port
is a STS-12C)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
166 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
167 Did PLM-P alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
168 RAI
RAI is remote alarm indication for T3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
169 RINGMAPPROV
RINGMAPPROV indicates the local node is provisioned for automap generation and is
unable to communicate around the network in either one direction or in both directions.
This is an indication of a DCC problem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
170 RING-SQLCH
RING-SQLCH indicates the optical facility is squelching traffic at the node. This is an
indication a ring switch has occurred on a non adjacent span on the BLSR network.
Problem is unrelated to the alarming node. Resolve all conditions which generated the
ring switch on the BLSR network. Go to Step 204.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
171 RFI
RFI is remote (FEND) failure indication for OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1,
STS12C, STS192C, STS3C, STS48C, STS192C.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
172 ROLLMON
ROLLMON indicates the receive-side of the new STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C, or
STS-192C port in the roll is being monitored for a valid signal. ROLLMON does not
clear until a valid signal is applied and detected.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
173 SDBER
SDBER indicates signal BER degrade for OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1,
STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C, or STS-192C. Problem can be caused by incoming facility,
dirty or bad fiber connector, or by degeneration of receive diode in module.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
174 UNEQ-P
UNEQ-P indicates STS1, STS-3C, STS-12C, STS-48C, or STS-192C path idle
(unequipped) condition.
Check provisioning of supporting equipment. Correct provisioning if necessary. Refer to
1678 MCC TL1 User Provisioning Guide.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
175 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
176 VCGLOA
VCGLOA indicates loss of alignment on the VCG while one or more of its members are
cross-connected and able to carry traffic.
Clear the GBE alarms on the ethernet side.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
177 Go to Step 204.

VCGLPF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
178 VCGLPF indicates LCAS protocol failure on the VCG.

Verify Far End equipment LCAS provisioning matches the 1678 Metro Core Connect
(MCC).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
179 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
180 VCGPLC
VCGPLC indicates partial loss of capacity on the VCG when LCAS is enabled.
Clear SONET-related alarms upstream.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
181 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
182 VCGPLM
VCGPLM indicates payload type mismatch on the GBEVCG. The C2 byte needs to be
set for GFP on the SONET facility.
Verify the STSs carrying ethernet are aligned with VCGs between nodes.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
183 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
184 VCGRFI
VCGRFI indicates remote failure indication on the VCG when LCAS is enabled.
Clear upstream VCG alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
185 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
186 VCGSSF
VCGSSF indicates server signal failure on the VCG while one or more of its members are
cross-connected and enabled (VCACT).
Clear STS alarms.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
187 Verify that there is no excessive differential delay on STSs.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
188 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
189 VCLOM
VCLOM indicates loss of multiframe on the path facility that is a member of a VCG.
Verify the two ends of VCGs and STSs are aligned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
190 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
191 VCMND
VCMND indicates the differential delay on a path facility that is a member of a VCG
cannot be compensated.
Verify there is no excessive differential delay on the STSs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
192 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
193 VCSQM
VCSQM indicates sequence number mismatch on a path facility that is a member of a
VCG.
Verify the two ends of VCGs and STSs are aligned.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
194 Go to Step 204.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
195 WKSWBK
WKSWBK indicates automatic switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1,
STS-3C, STS-12C, or STS-48C from protection back to working facility. This is a
standing condition (no action required) reported by REPTÂLM^x or REPTÊVT^x,
where x = OC3, OC12, OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, or STS48C.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
196 WKSWPR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WKSWPR indicates automatic switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1, STS-3C,
STS-12C, or STS-48C from working to protection facility. This is a standing condition
(no action required) reported by REPTÂLM^x or REPTÊVT^x, where x = OC3, OC12,
OC48, OC192, STS1, STS3C, STS12C, or STS-48C.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
197 WKSWBK-FE
WKSWBK-FE indicates automatic switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 from
protection back to working facility at the far end. This is a standing condition (no action
required) reported by REPTÂLMÔC3, REPTÂLMÔC12, REPTÂLMÔC48,
REPTÂLMÔC192, REPTÊVTÔC3, REPTÊVTÔC12, and REPTÊVTÔC48,
REPTÊVTÔC192.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
198 WKSWPR-FE
WKSWPR-FE indicates automatic switch of OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 from
working to protection facility at the far end. This is a standing condition (no action
required) reported by REPTÂLMÔC3, REPTÂLMÔC12, REPTÂLMÔC48,
REPTÂLMÔC192, REPTÊVTÔC3, REPTÊVTÔC12, REPTÊVTÔC48, and
REPTÊVTÔC192.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
199 WKSWPR-RING
WKSWPR-RING indicates automatic ring switch of OC-48, OC-192 from working to
protection facility. This is a standing condition (no action required) reported by
REPTÂLM^x or REPTÊVT^x, where x=OC48 or OC192.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
200 WKSWPR-RING-FE
WKSWPR-RING-FE indicates automatic ring switch of OC-48 or OC-192 from working
to protection facility at the far end. This is a standing condition (no action required)
reported by REPTÂLM^x or REPTÊVT^x, where x=OC48 or OC192.
Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
201 WTR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
WTR indicates an STS-1, STS-3C, STS-12C, or STS-48C facility is in wait to restore
state.
Wait for wait-to-restore timer to expire, at which time the facility returns to normal
working order. Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
202 WTR-FE
WTR-FE indicates an OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, or OC-192 facility is in wait to restore state
at the far end.
Wait for wait-to-restore timer to expire, at which time the facility returns to normal
working order. Go to Step 204.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
203 APSB
Contact next level of technical support for assistance.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
204 STOP. This procedure is complete.

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-2: CONTBUS
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-2: CONTBUS

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a CONTBUS alarm for ES64SC,
FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, and MX640GA modules.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

In this procedure, the equipment address is N-R-Sh-S, where N=equipment type, R=rack
number, Sh=shelf number, and S=equipment slot location number in the shelf.
Task
WARNING
Electric-shock hazard
Modules can be installed and removed with bay power on. Hazardous electrical
potentials are present.
Use extreme care when installing or removing modules.
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Modules contain electrostatic-sensitive devices. These devices can be damaged by
electrostatic discharge.
Refer to Introduction, Section “Electrostatic sensitive devices” (p. 1-17) for special
handling instructions.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter RTRV-COND-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. Note equipment AID with CONTBUS alarm/condition. Also note other
alarms and conditions in system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 NOTICE
Possibility of service interruption. If mate of module in alarm is also in alarm and/or not
available for protection, do not continue with procedure.
Wait a few minutes to see if alarm clears on its own.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Did alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Replace module with alarm. Refer to one of the following procedures:

• For ES64SC, refer to Procedure 3-41: “ES64SC replacement in a protected
configuration” (p. 3-199).
• For FLCCONGI, refer to Procedure 3-32: “FLCCONGI replacement” (p. 3-158).
• For FLCSERVA, refer to Procedure 3-31: “FLCSERVA replacement” (p. 3-148).
• For MX320GA/MX640GA, refer to Procedure 3-33: “MX320GA/MX640GA
replacement” (p. 3-168).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Did CONTBUS alarm clear?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Contact next level of technical support for assistance.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm)

When to use
This procedure provides instruction to clear a Fuse Alarm (FA) for BUSTERM, ES64SC,
FAN, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA, P16S16, P16S1S, P16S1S4,
P2S64X, P2XGE, P4S64X, P8S16, and PSF.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

An FA alarm indicates a fuse alarm.
In this procedure, the address is R-Sh-S, where R=rack number, Sh=shelf number, and
S=equipment slot location number in the shelf.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Replace module with fuse alarm:

• If P16S16, P16S1S, P16S1S4, P2S64X, P4S64X, or P8S16 module, go to Procedure
3-28: “OC-n input/output card replacement” (p. 3-132).
• If FLCSERVA module, go to Procedure 3-31: “FLCSERVA replacement” (p. 3-148).
• If FLCCONGI module, go to Procedure 3-32: “FLCCONGI replacement” (p. 3-158).
• If MX320GA/MX640GA module, go to Procedure 3-33: “MX320GA/MX640GA
• If P16GEFC, or P8GEFC, or P2XGE, go to Procedure 3-45: “Gigabit Ethernet card
• If P2XGE, go to Procedure 3-48: “ 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement” (p. 3-226).
• If PSF, go to Procedure 3-34: “PSF replacement” (p. 3-171).
• If FAN, go to Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement” (p. 3-175).
• If BUSTERM module, go to Procedure 3-36: “BUSTERM replacement” (p. 3-177).
• If ES64SC, go to Procedure 3-41: “ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration”
(p. 3-199).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Did alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a FANEQPT equipment alarm for a FAN or
STEPUP.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Unless otherwise specified with a different condition type for specific fans, a FANEQPT
alarm indicates that an error has been detected and associated with a fan.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Note AID or equipment with FANEQPT alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace module with FANEQPT alarm.

If FAN module, refer to Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement” (p. 3-175).
If STEPUP module, refer to Procedure 3-39: “2-kW step-up converter replacement”
(p. 3-183).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Did module replacement clear FANEQPT alarm?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-5: FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-5: FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on clearing a FRNGSYNC alarm.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A FRNGSYNC alarm indicates that the Clock Reference Generator (CRG) is in free
running synchronization mode.
In this procedure, the address is R-Sh-S, where R=rack number, Sh=shelf number, and
S=equipment slot location number in the shelf.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Observe output.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Is there a MANSWTOINT condition present?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 MANSWTOINT indicates that timing was manually switched to internal mode which
results in the clock being in a FRNGSYNC state.
Does internal timing state need to be changed?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 The only way a clock should be in FRNGSYNC (INT) mode is a manual switch to
internal mode with the OPR-SYNCNSW command, or if no in-service BITS or OCn
timing references were present when the clock was initially installed in the shelf.
Enter RTRV-BITS;
OR
Enter RTRV-OCn;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Is the state of at least one of BITS references (0,1) or OCn references IS-NR?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter RTRV-SYNCN;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Determine which BITS reference (0,1) or OCn reference that was in-service (IS) in Step 7
is going to be used (PRI or SEC).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter OPR-SYNCNSW:::::SWITCHTO;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
SWITCHTO = PRI or SEC as determined in Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Did FRNGSYNC clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-6: HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-6: HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a HLDOVRSYNC alarm on a MX320GA or
MX640GA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A HLDOVRSYNC alarm indicates the Clock Reference Unit (CRU) on the matrix
module is in holdover synchronization mode.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Clock goes into HLDOVRSYNC condition when both timing references have failed.
Enter RTRV-BITS;
OR
Enter RTRV-OCn;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 For either command, determine provisioning of references.

If RTRV-BITS; command, go to Step 4.
If RTRV-OCn; command, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Does provisioning of BITS references match the BITS source in the Central Office?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Does the provisioning of the OCn references match the OCn sources in the Central
Office?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter
ED-BITS::AID::::[CMDMDE=][,LINECDE=][,FMT=][,LBO0=][,LBO1=]:
[PST]; to modify the BITS reference to match the BITS source in the Central Office.
where:
AID = BITS-0 or BITS-1
Other parameters are optional. If a value is not entered for these parameters, the system
will use the current value. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on
parameter values.
OR
Enter ED-OCn; to modify the OCn reference to match the OCn source in the Central
Office.
where:
Other parameters are optional. If a value is not entered for these parameters, the system
will use the current value. Refer to 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide for details on
parameter values.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Repeat Step 6 to modify other BITS or OCn references, if needed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Did HLDOVRSYNC clear? (This may take up to 15 seconds.)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter RTRV-BITS;
OR
Enter RTRV-OCn;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Is the state of either BITS reference (0,1) or OCn reference IS-NR?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 If at least one BITS reference or OCn reference is IS-NR, the clock should not be in
HLDOVRSYNC. Go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Problem is most likely with the BITS source or the OCn source.
Enter RTRV-COND-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Is there a SYNCPRI or SYNCSEC alarm in the system?

If yes, clear SYNCPRI and/or SYNCSEC alarms. Refer to Procedure 3-17: “COM alarm
or event” (p. 3-98) for SYNCPRI and Procedure 3-17: “COM alarm or event”
(p. 3-98) for SYNCSEC, then go to Step 16. If no, go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 After SYNCPRI and/or SYNCSEC alarms have cleared, enter RTRV-COND-ALL;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Did HLDOVRSYNC clear? (This may take up to 300 seconds.)

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-7: HWCFGBUS alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-7: HWCFGBUS alarm

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear an HWCFGBUS alarm for MX320GA and
MX640GA modules.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

This alarm indicates that the Hardware Configuration Bus (HWCFGBUS) is not available
at the moment. Matrix switching/equipment protection switching is blocked. Maintenance
actions should be avoided.
In the event of a non-working HWCFGBUS, the configuration of boards is no more
possible. Traffic is not directly concerned, but may be impacted by maintenance actions.
Especially matrix switches and board plug-ins should not be done.
The problem can occur for active as well as for passive/standby boards. If an active board
is concerned, the problem may be traffic-affecting.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
Do not attempt to clear this alarm. Traffic may be impacted by maintenance actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a HWFAIL alarm on a BUSTERM,
ES64SC, FAN, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MDL, MX320GA, MX640GA, P16GEFC,
P16S16, P16S1S, P16S1S4, P2S64X, P4S64X, P8GEFC, P8S16, PSF, SFP, or XFP.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A HWFAIL alarm indicates a hardware error is detected on a module.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear an IMPROPRMVL alarm on a BUSTERM,
ES64SC, FAN, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA, P16GEFC, P16S16,
P16S1S, P16S1S4, P2S64X, P4S64X, P8GEFC, P8S16, PSF, SFP, or XFP.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

IMPROPRMVL alarm indicates a module was physically removed before being logically
removed.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is IMPROPRMVL alarm declared on a module?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Is there a module in slot with IMPROPRMVL alarm?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove module. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Install module. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Wait 60 seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Did IMPROPRMVL alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear an inhibit switch duplex condition on an
ES64SC, MX320GA, or MX640GA module.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

INHSWDX indicates that a duplex (redundant) module is inhibited from copy switching.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Are there other alarms on working module with INHSWDX?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Resolve other alarms on working module. Refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing
procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::AID; for module with INHSWDX.

where: AID = Equipment access identifier or ALL
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Did INHSWDX condition clear?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear an ISPBUS alarm for ES64SC, MX320GA,
and MX640GA modules.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

This alarm indicates that the non-redundant Intra-Shelf Parallel Bus (ISPB) bus is not
working or is working incorrectly. Matrix switching/equipment protection switching is
blocked. Maintenance actions should be avoided.
In the event of a non-working ISPB, all boards are completely out of control and
supervision. Traffic is not directly concerned, but may be impacted by maintenance
actions. Especially matrix switches and board plug-ins should not be done.
Note: The system indicates an ES64SC board which may be the origin for a
disturbed/corrupted ISPB. Older ES64SC boards (with part numbers 3AG24371AAC
or 3AG2437AAD, both with ICS = 01, 02 or 03) may cause signaling errors for the
ISPB bus in the event of an ES64SC power failure. In this case - as exception - the
alarmed board needs to be changed and a plug-in is allowed (see Procedure 3-41:
“ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration” (p. 3-199) or Procedure 3-42:
“ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration” (p. 3-202)).
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
Do not attempt to clear this alarm. Traffic is not directly concerned, but may be impacted
by maintenance actions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-12: LCASSEQ alarm
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-12: LCASSEQ alarm

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear an LCASSEQ alarm for ES64SC and
10-Gigabit Ethernet (P2XGE) modules.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

This alarm indicates that sequence numbering is corrupted for at least one LCAS group
on a board. The system indicates severe corruptions of LCAS sequence numbering which
may occur due to internal processing errors.
The problem can occur for active as well as for passive/standby boards. If an active board
is concerned, the problem may be traffic-affecting.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 NOTICE
Do not attempt to clear this alarm. Traffic may be impacted by maintenance actions.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-13: MAN alarm (equipment)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-13: MAN alarm (equipment)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a MAN alarm on a BUSTERM, ES64SC,
FAN, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA, P16GEFC, P16S16, P16S1S,
P16S1S4, P2S64X, P4S64X, P8GEFC, P8S16, PSF, SFP, STEPUP, or XFP.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A MAN alarm indicates that a module was logically removed. Determine if the module is
ready to be returned to service before performing this procedure.
In this procedure, the equipment address is N-R-Sh-S, where N=name of equipment,
R=rack, Sh=shelf, and S=slot location number of the equipment in the shelf.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID;
where: AID = Equipment access identifier of module with MAN alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. Is module in OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA,UEQ state?

If OOS-MA, go to Step 5.
If OOS-AUMA,UEQ, go to Step 4.
If none of these, go to Step 10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Physically install applicable module.

For an I/O module replacement (P2S64X, P4S64X, P8S16, P8GEFC, P16S16, P16S1S4,
P16S1S, P16GEFC), refer to Procedure 3-28: “OC-n input/output card replacement”
(p. 3-132).
For a gigabit ethernet module replacement (P8GEFC, P16GEFC), refer to Procedure
3-45: “Gigabit Ethernet card replacement” (p. 3-210)
For P2XGE, refer to Procedure 3-48: “ 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement” (p. 3-226).
For BUSTERM replacement, refer to Procedure 3-36: “BUSTERM replacement”
(p. 3-177).
For ES64SC replacement, refer to Procedure 3-41: “ES64SC replacement in a protected
configuration” (p. 3-199).
For FAN replacement, refer to Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement” (p. 3-175).
For FLCCONGI replacement, refer to Procedure 3-32: “FLCCONGI replacement”
(p. 3-158).
For FLCSERVA replacement, refer to Procedure 3-31: “FLCSERVA replacement”
(p. 3-148).
For a matrix module replacement (MX320GA or MX640GA), refer to Procedure 3-33:
“MX320GA/MX640GA replacement” (p. 3-168).
For PSF replacement, refer to Procedure 3-34: “PSF replacement” (p. 3-171).
For an SFP replacement (SS161, SL161, SL162, SL162 (DWDM), SS41, SL41, SL42,
SS11, SL11, SL12, 1000BSX, 1000BLX), refer to Procedure 3-30: “SFP replacement”
(p. 3-144).
For STEPUP replacement, refer to Procedure 3-39: “2-kW step-up converter
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
For an XFP replacement (XI641, XS642B, XP1L12D2), refer to Procedure 3-29: “XFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter RST-EQPT::N-R-Sh-S; for module in alarm.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Replace module. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27).

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Did MAN alarm or event clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a PRCDRERR alarm on a BUSTERM,
ES64SC, FAN, FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, MDL, MX320GA, MX640GA, P16GEFC,
P16S16, P16S1S, P16S1S4, P2S64X, P4S64X, P8GEFC, P8S16, PSF, SFP, or XFP.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

PRCDRERR indicates a module is inserted in an incorrect slot.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Observe output. Note module with PRCDRERR alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace module with PRCDRERR alarm. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures”

(p. 3-27) for module replacement procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did PRCDRERR clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-15: PWR
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-15: PWR

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to locate and clear a power supply alarm.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Before you begin

Trouble-clearing procedure for board type PSF

The system supervises the power supply of each PSF, i.e. the connection from the step-up
converter onto the PSF per branch. If the system detects a power outage for this part of
power supply, a PWR alarm is raised for the connected PSF. Complete the following
steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is there a PSF in slot which is in alarm?

If no, insert PSF. Refer to Procedure 3-34: “PSF replacement” (p. 3-171). Then go to Step
3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Is power switch on step-up converter set to ON?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Turn power switch on the step-up converter to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did power alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace step-up converter. Refer to Procedure 3-39: “2-kW step-up converter

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Set power switch to ON on the step-up converter.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Did power alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Trouble-clearing procedure for board type FLC
The system supervises the 3.3V service voltage distributed by each PSF to all other
boards. If the system detects an outage for the 3.3V service power supply, a PWR alarm is
raised on both FLC boards and a HWFAIL alarm is raised on the concerned PSF.
Complete the following steps:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is there a HWFAIL alarm for a PSF that is raised in parallel with the PWR alarm for the
FLC boards?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the PSF for which the HWFAIL alarm is raised. Refer to Procedure 3-34: “PSF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did PWR alarm for the FLC boards and HWFAIL alarm for the PSF clear?
If no, go to If no, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
Trouble-clearing procedure for board types MX640GA, MX320GA, FAN, P4S64X, P2S64X, P16S16,
P8S16, P16S1S, P16S1S4, P16GE, P8GE
The system supervises the power supply per branch for each of the three power planes. If
more than one board has a PWR alarm, probably one of the three redundant power planes
is failing. Additionally an FA alarm is raised at that PSF (= branch), where the failing
power plane is connected. Complete the following steps:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is there an FA alarm for a PSF that is raised in parallel with the PWR alarm for the other
boards?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Replace the PSF for which the FA alarm is raised. Refer to Procedure 3-34: “PSF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did PWR alarm for the other boards and FA alarm for the PSF clear?
If no, go to If no, go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-16: SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-16: SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a SYNCEQPT alarm against a MX320GA or
a MX640GA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A SYNCEQPT alarm indicates an equipment failure of the CRU.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Possibility of service interruption. Removing MX320GA or MX640GA on one copy could
affect traffic if MX320GA or MX640GA on other copy is failed, removed, out of service,
or unplugged.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Are any other alarms or events reported?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4) to resolve other alarms
or events
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; for matrix module in alarm.

where: AID = Access Identifier for matrix module in alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Observe output. Is SST WRK or STBYH?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Are any alarms or events on STBYH matrix module?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID; for STBYH matrix module in alarm.

where: AID = Access Identifier for STBYH matrix module in alarm
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Enter RTRV-ALM-EQPT::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enter RTRV-COND-EQPT::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Are any alarms or events reported on any equipment that is on opposite copy from
standby clock?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 The matrix module cannot be logically removed if there is a problem with the opposite
copy.
Refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4) to resolve other alarms
or events, then return to Step 10 of this procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Remove and replace STBYH matrix module in alarm. Refer to Procedure 3-33:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-17: COM alarm or event
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-17: COM alarm or event

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to identify and clear COM alarm or event.
Related information
Refer to the 1678 MCC Installation and System Turn-up Guide to determine circuit pack
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Facility alarms or events often generate COM alarms or events. Clear facility conditions
before clearing COM alarms or events.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; for alarm reports and RTRV-COND-ALL; for event reports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Are there any facility (GBE, GBE10, OC-3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, STS-1, STS-3C,
STS-12C, STS-48C, STS-192C, T3, VCG), or BITS alarms or events?
If yes, refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4) to locate alarm-
or event-clearing procedures.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter RTRV-ALM-COM; for alarm reports and RTRV-COND-COM; for event reports.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Observe output. Refer to Table 3-7, “COM Alarms/Conditions” (p. 3-98) for guidance on
conditions/events.
Table 3-7 COM Alarms/Conditions
Alarm/condition Type Go to step

AUTOMAPINIT COM Step 6
DB-BACKUP COM Step 7
DB-RESTORE COM Step 8
DBF COM Step 9
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Table 3-7 COM Alarms/Conditions (continued)
Alarm/condition Type Go to step

DRF COM Step 15
FRCDSWTOPRI COM Step 22
FRCDSWTOPRIOUT COM Step 26
FRCDSWTOSEC COM Step 30
FRCDSWTOSECOUT COM Step 34
INIT COM Step 38
MANSWTOINT COM Step 40
MANSWTOPRI COM Step 44
MANSWTOPRIOUT COM Step 48
MANSWTOSEC COM Step 52
MANSWTOSECOUT COM Step 56
NTPOOSYNC COM Step 60
SLTMSIG COM Step 77
SSMINVAL COM Step 83
SSMLOWQ COM Step 84
SYNCOOS COM Step 85
SYNCOUTPRI COM Step 94
SYNCOUTSEC COM Step 97
SYNCPRI COM Step 100
SYNCSEC COM Step 103
None of the above “Alarm and event
condition clearing
procedures” (p. 3-4)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 AUTOMAPINIT
AUTOMAPINIT indicates automap initialization is in process. No action is required.
Go to Step 106.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 DB BACKUPDB BACKUP
DB BACKUP indicates database backup is in process. No action is required.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Go to Step 106.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 DB RESTORE
DB RESTORE indicates database restoration is in process. No action is required.
Go to Step 106.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 DBF
DBF indicates creation of local backup database failed. After a successful database
backup, the system will clear the DBF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Attempt local database backup again?

• If yes, try database backup again and go to Step 106..
• If no, go to Step 11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Clear standing DBF condition without performing database backup again?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Enter CLR-COND::COM:::DBF;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Did DBF condition clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 DRF
DRF indicates restoration of local database failed. After a successful database restoration,
the system will clear the DRF condition.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Attempt local database restoration again?

If yes, try database restoration again and go to Step 106.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Clear standing DRF condition without performing database restoration again?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Enter CLR-COND::COM:::DRF;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Did DRF condition clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 FRCDSWTOPRI
The FRCDSWTOPRI indicates a forced manual switch to the primary reference source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Ready to release forced switch to primary reference?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Enter RLS-SYNCNSW;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; Enter RTRV-COND-ALL;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Did FRCDSWTOPRI alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 FRCDSWTOPRIOUT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The FRCDSWTOPRIOUT indicates a forced manual switch to the primary reference
source output.
Ready to release forced switch to primary output?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Enter RLS-SYNCNSW-OUT;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Did FRCDSWTOPRIOUT alarm clear?.

FRCDSWTOSEC
The FRCDSWTOSEC indicates a forced manual switch to the secondary reference
source.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Ready to release forced switch to secondary reference?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Did FRCDSWTOSEC alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 FRCDSWTOSECOUT
The FRCDSWTOSECOUT indicates a forced manual switch to the secondary reference
source output.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Ready to release forced switch to secondary output?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Did FRCDSWTOSECOUT alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 INIT
The INIT indicates that system initialization is currently in progress. This condition is
reported by REPTÎNFORMATION. Condition will clear on its own; no action is
necessary.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 MANSWTOINT
The MANSWTOINT indicates a manual switch to internal timing. Any FRNGSYNC,
SYNCPRI, SYNCSEC, SYNCOOS, or SYNCEQPT conditions set against the matrix
modules or BITS will be cleared when switch to internal timing takes place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Ready to release manual switch to internal?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 Did MANSWTOINT alarm clear?.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 MANSWTOPRI
The MANSWTOPRI indicates a manual switch to the primary reference.
Ready to release manual switch to primary reference?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Did MANSWTOPRI alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 MANSWTOPRIOUT
The MANSWTOPRIOUT indicates a manual switch to the primary reference output.
Ready to release manual switch to primary reference output?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 Did MANSWTOPRIOUT alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52 MANSWTOSEC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The MANSWTOSEC indicates a manual switch to the secondary reference.
Ready to release manual switch to secondary reference?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
55 Did MANSWTOSEC alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
56 MANSWTOSECOUT
The MANSWTOSECOUT indicates a manual switch to the secondary reference output.
Ready to release manual switch to secondary reference output?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
59 Did MANSWTOSECOUT alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
60 NTPOOSYNC
Verify NTP server is provisioned.
Enter RTRV-NTP-ADDR;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
61 Is NTP server provisioned?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
62 Enter ENT-NTP-ADDR::::::IP=a;
where:
a=(0-99,101-126,128-223)-(0-255)-(0-255)-(0-255) IP address of NTP server
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
64 Did NTPOOSYNC alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
65 Verify the NTP server is functioning properly.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
66 Is the NTP server functioning properly?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
67 Restore NTP server to a functioning operational state.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
69 Did NTPOOSYNC alarm clear?.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
70 Is node reporting NTPOOSYNC alarm at Gateway Network Element (GNE)?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
71 Verify the DCC functionality.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
72 Is the DCC functioning properly?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
73 Restore DCC functionality to an operational state.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
75 Did NTPOOSYNC alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
76 SLTMSIG
An SLTMSIG alarm indicates a CRU has detected that an external reference frequency
has moved off the required accuracy limits.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
77 WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
78 Check BITS timing source.

If there is a problem, go to Step 79.
If there is not a problem, go to Step 105.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
79 Can the problem be fixed?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
80 Fix the problem.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
82 Did the SLTMSIG alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
83 SSMINVAL
SSMINVAL alarm indicates no valid sync message has been detected on the incoming
sync signal for more than 10 seconds.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
84 SSMLOWQ
SSMLOWQ alarm indicates the SSM reference, incoming clock, quality received is lower
than a stratum 3E quality and the system has switched to holdover mode.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
85 SYNCOOS
SYNCOOS alarm indicates the primary and secondary external reference has failed (on
both CRUs) and the system is going into holdover.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
86 WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
Select action.
If no clock reference is installed, go to Step 87.
If clock reference with alarm is present and plugged in, go to Step 89.
If no valid timing source is available (synchronization is in holdover mode), go to Step 91
.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
87 Install a matrix module. Refer to Procedure 3-33: “MX320GA/MX640GA replacement”

(p. 3-168).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
88 Go to Step 92.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
89 Replace clock reference in alarm. Refer to Procedure 3-33: “MX320GA/MX640GA

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
90 Go to Step 92.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
91 Resolve at least one of the outstanding SYNCPRI/SYNCSEC alarms. Go to Step 5.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
92 Enter RTRV-ALM-ALL; or RTRV-COND-ALL;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
93 Did SYNCOOS alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
94 SYNCOUTPRI
SYNCOUTPRI alarm indicates the reference for sync output with the highest
priority/quality has failed on at least one CRU while at least one other provisioned
reference has not failed.
Enter RTRV-SYNCN-OUT;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
95 Observe output. Note primary reference output and secondary reference output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
96 Go to Step 105.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
97 SYNCOUTSEC
SYNCOUTSEC alarm indicates that at least one provisioned reference for sync output
has failed on one CRU. The reference with the highest priority/quality has not failed.
Enter RTRV-SYNCN-OUT;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
98 Observe output. Note primary reference output and secondary reference output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
99 Go to Step 105.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
100 SYNCPRI
SYNCPRI alarm indicates the reference with the highest priority/quality has failed on at
least one CRU while at least one other provisioned reference has not failed.
Enter RTRV-SYNCN;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
101 Observe output. Note primary reference and secondary reference.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
102 Go to Step 105.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SYNCSEC
SYNCSEC alarm indicates the at least one provisioned reference has failed on one CRU.
The reference with the highest priority/quality has not failed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
103 Enter RTRV-SYNCN;

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
104 Observe output. Note primary reference and secondary reference.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-18: MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-18: MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a MISC-1 alarm against an MX320GA or
MX640GA module.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Both MX units should be equipped. If both MX units are equipped, monitor alarm for an
hour. Alarm should clear on its own.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Did alarm clear?

If no, contact next level support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-19: INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA,
MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-19: INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
Provides procedure to clear an INTERR on an ES64SC, MX320GA or MX640GA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

INTERR indicates an internal error on equipment. This procedure provides guidelines on
how to find the problem causing INTERR, but it does not cover all possibilities.
If a MISC-1 alarm on a MX320GA or MX640GA is standing, clearing the MISC-1 alarm
should clear the INTERR alarm. Refer to Procedure 3-18: “MISC-1 (MX320GA,
MX640GA)” (p. 3-112).
The DGN-EQPT command tests the following communication links:
• NGIRX; tests NGI communication links from IO modules to matrix modules.
• NGITX; tests NGI communication links from matrix modules to IO modules.
In this procedure, N=module; R=rack; Sh=shelf; and S=slot location number.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Is module declaring INTERR alarm an ES64SC?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. Are there any other alarms or conditions on the same matrix module that
has the INTERR?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clear other alarms or conditions on the matrix module. Refer to “Alarm and event
condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Did INTERR clear after other alarms and conditions were cleared?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter DGN-EQPT:::::NGISTATES;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Does the output indicate a failure with one IO module (NGIRX, NGITX, or both) failed
against one or both matrix modules?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Replace IO module indicted in Step 9. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures”

(p. 3-27).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Did INTERR clear after IO module replacement?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Does the output indicate a failure with more than one IO modules (NGIRX, NGITX, or
both) failed against only one matrix module?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Replace matrix module indicted in Step 13. Refer to Procedure 3-33:

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Did INTERR clear after matrix module replacement?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-20: LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI,
FLCSERVA, MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-20: LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI,

When to use
Provides procedure to clear a LANDEGR alarm on an ES64SC, FLCCONGI,
FLCSERVA, MX320GA, or MX640GA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

LANDEGR indicates that LAN redundancy is degraded. The internal LAN connections
from the active FLC to the alarmed equipment is no longer redundant. The FLC is not
connected to the external LAN.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Against which module is the LANDEGR alarm set?

If ES64SC, go to Step 5.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-20: LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, FLCCONGI,
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If FLCCONGI or FLCSERVA, go to Step 2.
If MX320GA or MX640GA, go to Step 5.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Check external LAN connection. Verify it is plugged in and not faulted.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Did LANDEGR alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-21: LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-21: LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
Provides procedure to clear an LSSC alarm on an ES64SC, MX320GA, or MX640GA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

LSSC indicates that the subsystem controlled by the equipment cannot be provisioned or
supervised at the moment.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Information is being downloaded to module. LSSC alarm will clear on its own. No action
is needed.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-22: STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-22: STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA)

When to use
Provides procedure to clear a STBYDBC alarm on an FLCCONGI or FLCSERVA.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

STBYDBC indicates the primary backup database copy on the standby FLC is corrupted.
FLC protection switching is inhibited.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-23: HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-23: HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN)

When to use
Provides procedure to clear HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm on a FAN.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

HITEMP1 indicates the system air temperature has exceeded the first threshold at the
lower fan unit and the matrix card. HITEMP2 indicates the system air temperature has
exceeded the second threshold at the lower fan unit and the matrix card.
HITEMP1 and 2 alarms are only reported by the active matrix module and is declared
against the fan module.
HITEMP1 and 2 alarms are indications that the system is not cooling properly.
Task
NOTICE
Unplugging a matrix board while it is active causes traffic interruption of more than 100
ms. During the extraction, the contacts of the matrix board connectors chatter with
backpanel connectors, causing line alarms even if the persistency time is configured for
100 ms. This fault triggers a restoration in GMPLS networks.
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify Building
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Verify that the buildings ambient room temperature is within the normal operating range.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is the buildings ambient temperature within normal operating range (5-40 degrees
Celsius)?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify Filter
Verify the condition of the filter. Refer to Procedure 3-37: “FAN dust filter replacement”
(p. 3-179).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Clean the FAN unit protection. Refer to Procedure 3-37: “FAN dust filter replacement”
(p. 3-179).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Did the filter or Fan unit protection require cleaning or replacement?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Wait 30 minutes for normal operating temperature to be restored.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Did the HITEMP1 or 2 alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Verify Fan Operation

Verify both upper and lower FANs are operating properly.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Observe the green LEDs are illuminated on both the upper and lower FANs.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Are both FANs operating properly and the green LEDs illuminated on both the upper and
lower FANs?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Is an alarm or condition declared associated with either FAN?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Replace indicted FAN. Refer to Procedure 3-35: “FAN replacement” (p. 3-175).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Wait 30 minutes for the replacement fan to restore normal operating temperature.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Did HITEMP1 or 2 alarm clear?

Verify Matrix Module Temperature Sensor
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; for both matrix modules.

where:
AID = Access Identifier of matrix modules,
MX640GA-1-3-(10,11) for MX640GA matrix or
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MX320GA-1-3-(10,11) for MX320GA matrix
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Observe outputs. Identify the active (SST=WRK) matrix module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID;
where:
AID = Access Identifier of active matrix module,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Wait for REPT^SW to report before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Did the HITEMP1 or 2 alarm clear?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Replace the previously active matrix module. Refer to Procedure 3-33:

“MX320GA/MX640GA replacement” (p. 3-168)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Wait 30 minutes for normal operating temperature to be restored.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AID = Access Identifier of replaced matrix module,
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Wait for REPT^SW to report before continuing to the next step.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Observe output.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Did the HITEMP1 or 2 alarm return?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-24: SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-24: SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to clear a SNMPLINKFAIL alarm on an ES64SC.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

An SNMPLINKFAIL alarm indicates the SNMP and CLI management interface have lost
communications with the FLC.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-25: Lamp test (RAU)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-25: Lamp test (RAU)

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to lamp test the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC)
NGTRU RAU alarm summary and power LEDs.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

A Lamp Test failure indicates a communication failure between the FLC and the RAU.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter DGN-EQPT:::::LEDTEST:DURATION=a;
where:
a = 10-600 (LED test duration in seconds, default value is 10)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Did all the LEDs blink correctly?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Verify RAU front panel switch is in the "ON" or up position.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Verify BYPASS front panel switch is in the "ON" or vertical position.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Are both RAU and BYPASS front panel switches in the "ON" position?
If no, position front panel switches to the "ON" position, then go to Step 6.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Verify bypass cable (PN 3AG24381AA) is correct cable and properly connected between
NGTRU connectors M9 and M15. Refer to Engineering Support Documentation (PN
3EM19211AD) Installation Reference Drawing (PN 3EM195420004RJZZA).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Install, connect, or replace bypass cable appropriately.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Verify Housekeeping cable (PN 3AG24382AA) is correct cable and properly connected
between NGTRU connector M7 to FLC connector HK-RA. Refer to Engineering Support
Documentation (PN 3EM19211AD) Installation Reference Drawing (PN
3EM195420004RJZZA).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Install, connect, or replace Housekeeping cable appropriately.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Replace the RAU. Refer to Procedure 3-43: “RAU replacement” (p. 3-206).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Replace the BYPASS. Refer to Procedure 3-44: “BYPASS replacement” (p. 3-208).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-26: MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-26: MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA)

When to use
Provides procedure to clear an MXUPGRD on an MX320GA or MX640GA.
Related information
MXUPGRD indicates the system has successfully entered the MX320GA to MX640GA
matrix upgrade procedure.
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 MXUPGRD indicates the system has successfully entered the MX320GA to MX640GA
Matrix upgrade procedure. MXUPGRD only occurs during the MX320GA to MX640GA
Matrix upgrade procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Back out required on the Procedure 3-49: “MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix
upgrade procedure” (p. 3-230)?
If yes, follow the Procedure 3-49: “MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix upgrade
procedure” (p. 3-230). Then go to Step 3.
If no, return to the Procedure 3-49: “MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix upgrade
procedure” (p. 3-230), and continue with the procedure, and go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and
replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to remove and replace modules mechanically in the
1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC).
Related information
location and address.
Before you begin

Prerequisites
Module logical removal must be done first. This procedure addresses only mechanical
procedures. Refer to “Equipment replacement procedures” (p. 3-27).
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and
replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
Do not remove an in-service (IS) module. Removing a module that is in the IS state causes
a hit to or a loss of traffic.
Do applicable trouble clearing and logical replacement procedures before proceeding
with this procedure.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Loosen the screws on the front of the module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Unlock the extraction tabs on the front of the module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Remove the module from the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Install the new module in the slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Lock the extraction tabs on the front of the new module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Tighten the screws on the front of the new module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Return to DLP that logically removed this module, then logically restore it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Are there more modules to remove or install?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-28: OC-n input/output card replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-28: OC-n input/output card replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace an OC-192 module (P2S64X, P4S64X),
an OC-48 module (P8S16, P16S16), an OC-3/OC-12 module (P16S1S4), or a OC-3
module (P16S1S).
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

In this procedure, the equipment address is R-Sh-S, where R=rack number, Sh=shelf
number and S=equipment slot location number in the shelf.
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. Note any alarms and conditions associated with the module to be
replaced or the facilities supported by this module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 NOTICE
If mate of module to be replaced is also in alarm or declaring conditions and/or not
available for protection, do not continue with procedure.
Enter RTRV-FFP-OCn::AID; for each OC-n port on the module to be replaced.

where: AID = Access Identifier for OCn facility
This command identifies the mate card and mate port of the module to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Note the mate card and the mate ports.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of mate port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Does the mate port have an IS state?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter RTRV-OCn::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Note any IS-NR, WRK facilities on the module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Ensure that the mate facilities are all IS-NR, WRK or IS-NR, STBYH.
If the facilities are in one of these two states, go to Step 11.
If the facilities are not in one of these two states, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN; for each port in an IS-NR, WRK state on the

module to be replaced.
where: AID = Access Identifier for OCn facility on module to be replaced
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Ensure the service state of all facilities on the module to be replaced are IS-NR, STBYH.
If service states are IS-NR, STBYH, go to Step 14.
If service states are IS-NR, STBYH, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Ensure the service state of all facilities on the mate card are IS-NR,WRK.
If service states are IS-NR, WRK, go to Step 15.
If service states are not IS-NR,WRK, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of module to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Note the service state of the module.

If service state is IS, go to Step 17.
If service state is not IS, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID::FRCD;
where: AID = Access Identifier of I/O module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Ensure the service state of the module is OOS-MA.

If it is OOS-MA, go to Step 22.
If it is not OOS-MA, go to Step 40.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Carefully remove all the fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Remove and replace the module. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal
and replacement” (p. 3-130).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Carefully replace all the fibers.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; on newly inserted module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; on newly inserted module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Ensure the service state is IS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Enter RTRV-OCn::AID;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Ensure all the facilities on the new module show a service state of IS-NR, STBYH.
If IS-NR, STBYH is shown, go to Step 32.
If IS-NR, STBYH is not shown, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; for each OCn facility that was switched in Step 11.
where: AID = Access Identifier for each OCn facility
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; for each facility on the mate port that is in the IS-NR,
WRK state.
where: AID = Access Identifier for each OCn facility on mate port
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Ensure all facilities on the newly replace module are in the IS-NR,WRK state.
If the facilities are in IS-NR,WRK state, go to Step 34.
If the facilities are not in IS-NR,WRK state, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Ensure that all facilities are passing traffic.

If all facilities are passing traffic, go to Step 35.
If all facilities are not passing traffic, go to Step 40.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; for each facility previously switched in Step 31.

where: AID = Access Identifier for each OCn facility
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Ensure there are no alarms associated with the replaced module or facilities.
If there are alarms, go to Step 38.If there are no alarms, go to Step 41.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Ensure there are no conditions associated with the replaced module or facilities.
If there are conditions, refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
If there are no conditions, go to Step 41.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Contact the next level of technical support for assistance.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-29: XFP replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-29: XFP replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace an XFP (10GBE, 10GBL, 10GBS, XI641,
XS642B, and XP1L12D2).
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Change filters as required to maintain air flow. Failure to maintain air flow through bay
causes overheating and subsequent equipment damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 What IO module type houses the XFP to be replaced?

If OC192 XFP, go to Step 2.
If 10 Gigabit Ethernet XFP, go to Step 30.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 OC192 XFP replacement procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter RTRV-FFP-OC192::AID; for the XFP to be removed.
where: AID = Access Identifier for OC192 facility
This command identifies the mate OC192 port and the module for this XFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the XFP to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the mate XFP of the XFP to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure the mate XFP has a service state of IS.

If the service state is IS, go to Step 6.
If the service state is not IS, go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RTRV-OC192::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure the service state for the OC192 on the mate XFP is IS-NR,WRK.
If the service state is IS-NR,WRK, go to Step 11.
If the service state is not IS-NR,WRK, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OC192::AID:::MAN;
This command switches the mate OC192 to the IS-NR,WRK state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Ensure the service state for the OC192 on the mate XFP is IS-NR,WRK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID:::FRCD;
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the XFP to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure the XFP to be replaced has a service state of OOS-MA.

If the service state is OOS-MA, go to Step 13.
If the service state is not OOS-MA, go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Remove the fibers from the XFP to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Release the XFP latch for the XFP to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Gently pull the XFP out of the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Place the new XFP into the slot just vacated by the removed XFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Ensure the XFP latch clicks, securing the new XFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; for the newly replaced XFP.

where: AID = Access Identifier of newly replaced XFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Reconnect the fibers to the XFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Ensure the service state for the OC192 on the newly replaced XFP is IS-NR, STBYH.
If service state is IS-NR, STBYH, go to Step 23.
If service state is not IS-NR, STBYH, go to Step 47.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OC192::AID; on the OCn to be released from the previous switch

in Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OC192::AID:::MAN;
This command switches the OC192 for the newly replaced XFP to the IS-NR, WKG state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OC192::AID; on the XFP to release its OCn from the previous
switch in Step 24.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against the XFP or its associated
OC192.
If there are alarms or conditions, refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing
If there are no alarms or conditions, go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Ensure that traffic is running.

If traffic is running, go to Step 48.
If traffic is not running, go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 10 Gigabit Ethernet XFP Replacement Procedure

Is the 10 gigabit ethernet card to be replaced configured with LAG or path protection?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 NOTICE
ESD hazard
Enter RMV-EQPT::AID:::FRCD; where: AID=Access Identifier of the XFP to be

replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Ensure the XFP to be replaced has a service state of OOS-MA.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Remove the fibers from the XFP to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Release the XFP locking mechanism (latch) for the XFP to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Gently pull the XFP out of the slot and remove it from the module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Place the new XFP into the slot just vacated by the removed XFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Secure the XFP locking mechanism (latch) to secure the new XFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; for the newly replaced XFP.

where:
AID=Access Identifier of newly replaced XFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Reconnect the fibers to the XFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Enter RTRV-GBE10::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Ensure the service state for the GBE10 on the newly replaced XFP is IS-NR, STBYH.
If service state is IS-NR, go to Step 43.
If service state is not IS-NR, go to Step 47.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against the XFP or its associated
10GBE.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-30: SFP replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-30: SFP replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace an SFP on an OC-48 I/O card (SS161,
SL161, SL162, SL162 (DWDM)), an OC-12 I/O card (SS41, SL41, SL42), an OC-3 I/O
card (SS11, SL11, SL12), or on a Gigabit Ethernet card (1000BSX, 1000BLX).
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Change filters as required to maintain air flow. Failure to maintain air flow through bay
causes overheating and subsequent equipment damage.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure the extractor for the SFP, PN3AL 81424 AAAA, is available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-FFP-OCn::AID; for the SFP to be removed.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
This command identifies the mate OCn port and the module for this SFP.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the SFP to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the mate SFP of the SFP to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure the mate SFP has a service state of IS.

If the service state is IS, go to Step 6.
If the service state is not IS, go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure the service state for the OC-n on the mate SFP is IS-NR,WRK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN;
This command switches the mate OCn to the IS-NR,WRK state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Ensure the service state for the OCn on the mate SFP is IS-NR,WRK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier of the SFP to be replaced
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure the SFP to be replaced has a service state of OOS-MA.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Remove the fibers from the SFP to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Insert the extractor into the SFP to be replaced.

The extractor will lock into place when it is secure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Push the lever in on the left side of the extractor to unlock the SFP from the socket.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Gently pull the SFP out of the slot and remove it from the shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Place the new SFP into the appropriate slot.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; on newly inserted SFP.

where: AID = Access Identifier of newly inserted SFP
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Reconnect the fibers to the new SFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Ensure the service state for the OCn on the newly replaced SFP is IS-NR,STBYH.
If service state is IS-NR,STBYH, go to Step 22.
If service state is not IS-NR,STBYH, go to Step 29.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; on the SFP to be released from the previous switch in

Step 8.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Enter OPR-PROTNSW-OCn::AID:::MAN;
This command switches the OC-n for the newly replaced SFP to the IS-NR,WRK state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter RLS-PROTNSW-OCn::AID; on the SFP to release its OCn from the previous
switch in Step 23.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against the SFP or its associated OCn.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-31: FLCSERVA replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-31: FLCSERVA replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing an FLCSERVA module.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

The FLCSERVA replacement software process is executed in four phases:
• Clone phase: A ramdisk system is downloaded from the server. This system prepares
the hard disk of the new FLC and downloads the hard disk contents from the server to
the client. Afterwards the cloned system will be prepared for the first boot of the
runtime system from disk.
• Post installation: The new runtime system boots the first time from disk. CSServer
data is synchronized with the server FLC and the network configuration is updated.
• Save current installation: The now valid system installation and configuration is saved
for recovery.
• Final startup of the runtime system: The new FLC will start up in the maintenance
state.
Prerequisites
• The FLC systems of the network element must be configured properly.
• The FLC being replaced must be out of service.
• Manually check that it is possible to login as install user before doing the FLC
replacement.
Required equipment
• Replacement FLCSERVA module.
• RS-232 cable (3AL89583AAAA)
• Console cable (3AG2431AAAA) (debug cable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Execution of this procedure can interrupt the DCC traffic to and from the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note any conditions associated with the module to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note any alarms associated with the module to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to verify FLCSERVA being replaced is not in

working state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Is the FLCSERVA being replaced in a working state?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to switch FLCSERVA being replaced into

standby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Go to Step 3.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to put FLCSERVA being replaced out of service.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter INIT-SYS::FLCSERVA-1-3-1:::SHUT-DOWN; to shutdown FLC being

replaced.
Regardless of whether FLCSERVA being replaced is responding to TL1 commands
continue to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Wait one minute then unseat FLCSERVA being replaced from backplane and remove
from shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the replacement FLCSERVA module locate the label position on the board as shown
in Figure 3-1, “MAC address label position on board” (p. 3-150) and write down the
number indicated on the label as shown in Figure 3-2, “MAC address on the label”
(p. 3-151).
Figure 3-1 MAC address label position on board
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-2 MAC address on the label
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Insert replacement FLCSERVA in vacant slot but do not seat in backplane.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect the console port #14 as indicated in Figure 3-3, “First-level controller and
service interface board – front view” (p. 3-152) of the new FLCSERVA (client) to a PC or
laptop with console cable (3AG2431AAAA). Connect the external LAN cable that was
unplugged from the FLCSERVA being replaced to port #15 of the new FLCSERVA (see
Figure 3-3, “First-level controller and service interface board – front view” (p. 3-152)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-3 First-level controller and service interface board – front view
ACRONYM SLOT
(12)
FLCSERV 1
(11)
FLCSERVA
(18)
First Level Controler SPARE (19)
(9)
(20)
(21)
(13)
LEGEND:
(1) Reset command key OUT
(2) Personal Computer Connector (F interface) 2 1 (22)
(3) Synchronization Interface IN
(4) Red LED - Urgent alarm (Critical or Major) (1)
(5) Red LED - Not Urgent alarm (Minor) (10)
(6) Yellow LED - Alarm storing (Attended)
(7) Yellow LED - Abnormal condition
(8) Yellow LED - Indicative alarm (Warning (3)
(9) Line Seizure Key
(10) Alarm storing push-button (Attended)
(11) Green LED - When on it means active unit
(15)
(12) Multicolor LED
Red - local unit alarm (16)
Green - in service unit
Yellow - in standby unit
(13) Auxiliary Channels (2)
(14) EC and OAM Debug (internal use only)

(14)
(15) Q3 - Interface A
(17)
(16) Q3 - Interface B (4)
(17) Future CT Interface (not used) (5)
(6)
(18) Yellow LED (7)
(19) Green LED EOW Line Status
(8)
(20) Telephone Jack
(21) 4 Wire Telephone Extension
(22) 2 Mbit/s Auxiliary Channels
Adhesive Silkscreen Printing Front Plate

678-0418-1
040709
Start Two Terminal Programs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Connect the console cable between the COM1 and COM2/COM5 of PC/Laptop with the
console interface on the FLCs. Console cable must be plugged in on both serial interfaces
of Install Server PC or Laptop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Open two console windows on Install Server PC or laptop.

EM board (COM1; 9600 baud)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCR board (COM2/COM5; 38400 baud)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Activate file logging on both windows.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Configure Console window (Install Server <–> EM) using serial interface port COM1:
COM1 Baud rate 9600

Data 8 bit
Parity none
Stop 1 bit
Flow control none
Scroll buffer 5000 lines
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Configure Console window (Install Server <–> DCR) using next available COM port:
COM2 Baud rate 38400

Data 8 bit
Parity none
Stop 1 bit
Flow control none
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Seat replacement FLCSERVA into backplane and immediately interrupt EM boot

sequence by pressing <ESC> on COM1 serial terminal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 At MENMON prompt enter ee–def.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 At MENMON prompt enter rst.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Verify that the NBOOT is executed. Console output displays:

Searching for server (BOOTP)...........
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Note MAC address shown in the boot sequence. In case of an EM04A, line indicating
MAC address begins with (example MAC address 00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd):
Probing...[EEPRO100] 00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd at membase...
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Login to NE via TL1 using telnet: telnet <IP address> 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter ED-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1::::EMSNMBR=a,CMDMDE=FRCD;
where:
a=000000-999999 six digit EM processor serial number entered as a decimal
representation of the last 2 bytes of the EM MAC address. For example, in the above,
EMSNMBR would be entered as 000221. I.e. always use 6 digits, from this example
MAC address (00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd) the last two bytes would be “00:dd”.
Note: The number read from the label on the printed circuit board of the FLCSERVA
in Step 10 is the “MAC address” of the new FLCSERVA. Use this number as the
EMSNMBR. By reading it directly from the label you have no conversions or
calculations to make. You simply enter the number from the label (you have to add
zeros in front of the number to get 6 digits if there are less than 6 digits in the number
on the label).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Monitor the FLCSERVA and watch for the boot process to continue on the console/debug
cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Wait 90 minutes for FLCSERVA software installation to complete, then go to Step 27.
If 90 minutes have elapsed since software installation was started and FLCSERVA board
PST and SST is not IS,STBYH, go to Step 54.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 At the emServ prompt on the FLCSERVA after completion of the software installation
login as “install”on the FLCSERVA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Enter su -
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Enter mkdir -p /var/log/flccheck
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Enter mkdir -p /dcrroot/var/log/flccheck

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Enter > /var/log/flccheck/flccheck.log

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Enter cd /packages/ISU
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Enter ln -s . current
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Enter exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Enter bash
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Enter tools
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Enter sudo saveCurrentInstallation action on the new FLCSERVA.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 Enter exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Establish a telnet connection to active EM telnet IP address on port 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Login to NE via TL1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to verify new FLCSERVA is IS,STBYH.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Is FLCSERVA board PST and SST, IS,STBYH?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to verify FLCCONGI is IS,WRK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 Is FLCCONGI board PST and SST, IS,WRK?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Enter INIT-SYS::FLCCONGI-1-3-20:::COLD,FRCD;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reboot of the FLCCONGI will cause the user to be logged off the system.
Reboot takes approximately 5 minutes to complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Login to NE with telnet <IP address> 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 Enter RTRV-ALM-COM::COM; to verify INIT alarm has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
49 Has INIT alarm cleared?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to verify new FLCSERVA is IS,WRK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 Is FLCSERVA board PST and SST, IS,WRK?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to verify FLCCONGI is IS,STBYH.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53 Is FLCCONGI board PST and SST, IS,STBYH?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-32: FLCCONGI replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-32: FLCCONGI replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing an FLCCONGI module.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

The FLCCONGI Replacement software process is executed in four phases:
• Clone phase: A ramdisk system is downloaded from the server. This system prepares
the hard disk of the new FLC and downloads the hard disk contents from the server to
the client. Afterwards the cloned system will be prepared for the first boot of the
runtime system from disk.
• Post installation: The new runtime system boots the first time from disk. CSServer
data is synchronized with the server FLC and the network configuration is updated.
• Save current installation: The now valid system installation and configuration is saved
for recovery.
• Final startup of the runtime system: The new FLC will start up in the maintenance
state.
Prerequisites
• The FLC systems of the network element must be configured properly.
• The FLC being replaced must be out of service.
• Manually check that it is possible to login as install user before doing the FLC
replacement.
Required equipment
• Replacement FLCCONGI module.
• RS-232 cable (3AL89583AAAA)
• Console cable (3AG2431AAAA) (debug cable)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Execution of this procedure can interrupt the DCC traffic to and from the system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note any conditions associated with the module to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note any alarms associated with the module to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to verify FLCCONGI being replaced is not in

working state.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Is FLCCONGI being replaced in working state?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to switch FLCCONGI being replaced into

standby.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Go to Step 3.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter RMV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to put FLCCONGI being replaced out of

service.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter INIT-SYS::FLCCONGI-1-3-20:::SHUT-DOWN; to shutdown FLC being

replaced.
Regardless of whether FLCCONGI being replaced is responding to TL1 commands
continue to Step 9.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Wait one minute then unseat FLCCONGI being replaced from backplane and remove
from shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the replacement FLCCONGI locate the label position on the board as shown in Figure
3-4, “MAC address label position on board” (p. 3-160) and write down the number
indicated on the label as shown in Figure 3-5, “MAC address on the label” (p. 3-161).
Figure 3-4 MAC address label position on board
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-5 MAC address on the label
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Insert replacement FLCCONGI in vacant slot but do not seat in backplane.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect the console port #14 as indicated in Figure 3-6, “First-level controller and
control and general interface – front view” (p. 3-162) of the new FLCCONGI (client) to a
PC or laptop with console cable (3AG2431AAAA). Connect the external LAN cable that
was unplugged from the FLCCONGI being replaced to port #15 of the new FLCCONGI
(see Figure 3-6, “First-level controller and control and general interface – front view”
(p. 3-162)).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-6 First-level controller and control and general interface – front view
ACRONYM SLOT
FLCCONGI 20 (12)
(11)
First Level Controller MAIN
(9)
(13)
LEGEND: (1)
(10)
(1) Reset command key
(2) Personal Computer Connector (F interface)
(3) Synchronization Interface (3)
(4) Red LED - Urgent alarm (Critical or Major)
(5) Red LED - Not Urgent alarm (Minor)
(6) Yellow LED - Alarm storing (Attended)
(7) Yellow LED - Abnormal condition (15)
(8) Yellow LED - Indicative alarm (W arning)
(9) Rack Lamps (16)
(10) Alarm storing push-button (Attended)
(11) Green LED - When on it means active unit (2)
(12) Multicolor LED (14)
Red - local unit alarm (17)
Green - in service unit (4)
Yellow - in standby unit
(5)
(13) Housekeeping and Remote Alarms (6)
(7)
(14) EC and OAM Debug (internal use only)
(8)
(15) Q3 - Interface A
(16) Q3 - Interface B
(17) Future CT Interface (not used)
Adhesive Silkscreen Printing Front Plate

678-0419-1
040709
Start two terminal programs

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Connect the console cable between the COM1 and COM2/COM5 of PC/Laptop with the
console interface on the FLCs. Console cable must be plugged in on both serial interfaces
of Install Server PC or Laptop.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Open two console windows on Install Server PC or Laptop.

EM board (COM1; 9600 baud)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCR board (COM2/COM5; 38400 baud)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Activate file logging on both windows.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Configure Console window (Install Server <–> EM) using serial interface port COM1:
COM1 Baud rate 9600

Data 8 bit
Parity none
Stop 1 bit
Flow control none
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Configure Console window (Install Server <–> DCR) using next available COM port:
COM2 Baud rate 38400

Data 8 bit
Parity none
Stop 1 bit
Flow control none
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Seat replacement FLCCONGI into backplane and immediately interrupt EM boot

sequence by pressing <ESC> on COM1 serial terminal.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 At MENMON prompt enter ee–def.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 At MENMON prompt enter rst.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Verify that the NBOOT is executed. Console output displays:

Searching for server (BOOTP) ...........
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Note MAC address shown in the boot sequence. In case of an EM04A, line indicating
MAC address begins with (example MAC address 00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd):
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
Probing...[EEPRO100] 00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd at membase...
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
1234567890123456789012345678901212345678901234567890123456789
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Login to NE via TL1 using telnet: telnet <IP address> 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter ED-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20::::EMSNMBR=a,CMDMDE=FRCD;
where:
a=000000-999999 six digit EM processor serial number entered as a decimal
representation of the last 2 bytes of the EM MAC address. For example, in the above,
EMSNMBR would be entered as 000221. I.e. always use 6 digits, from this example
MAC address (00:c0:3a:2d:00:dd) the last two bytes would be “00:dd”.
Note: The number read from the label on the printed circuit board of the FLCCONGI
in Step 10 is the “MAC address” of the new FLCSERVA. Use this number as the
EMSNMBR. By reading it directly from the label you have no conversions or
calculations to make. You simply enter the number from the label (you have to add
zeros in front of the number to get 6 digits if there are less than 6 digits in the number
on the label).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Monitor the FLCCONGI and watch for the boot process to continue on the console/debug
cable.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Wait 90 minutes for FLCSERVA software installation to complete, then go to Step 27.
If 90 minutes have elapsed since software installation was started and FLCSERVA board
PST and SST is not IS,STBYH, go to Step 54.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 At the emServ prompt on the FLCCONGI after completion of the software installation
login as “install”on the FLCCONGI.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Enter su -
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Enter mkdir -p /var/log/flccheck

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Enter mkdir -p /dcrroot/var/log/flccheck

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Enter > /var/log/flccheck/flccheck.log

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Enter cd /packages/ISU
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
33 Enter ln -s . current
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Enter exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Enter bash
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Enter tools
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Enter sudo saveCurrentInstallation action on the new FLCCONGI.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 Enter exit
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Establish a telnet connection to active EM telnet IP address on port 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Login to NE via TL1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to verify new FLCCONGI is IS,STBYH.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Is FLCCONGI board PST and SST, IS,STBYH?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to verify FLCSERVA is IS,WRK.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 Is FLCSERVA board PST and SST, IS,WRK?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Enter INIT-SYS::FLCSERVA-1-3-1:::COLD,FRCD;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

Reboot of the FLCSERVA will cause the user to be logged off the system.
Reboot takes approximately 5 minutes to complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Login to NE with telnet <IP address> 3083.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 Enter RTRV-ALM-COM::COM; to verify INIT alarm has cleared.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
49 Has INIT alarm cleared?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCCONGI-1-3-20; to verify new FLCCONGI is IS,WRK.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 Is FLCCONGI board PST and SST, IS,WRK?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52 Enter RTRV-EQPT::FLCSERVA-1-3-1; to verify FLCSERVA is IS,STBYH.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53 Is FLCSERVA board PST and SST, IS,STBYH?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-33: MX320GA/MX640GA replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-33: MX320GA/MX640GA replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing a matrix module (MX320GA or
MX640GA).
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Unplugging a matrix board while it is active causes traffic interruption of less than 50 ms
NOTICE
Extracting the active matrix board A leads to an immediate matrix switch to matrix B. A
reinsertion of the matrix board A before the LED of the matrix board B turns to 'green',
leads to a switch back to matrix A. Matrix A becomes the active matrix again and matrix
B the standby matrix. LED alignment takes place after about 2 - 3 minutes.
This switch back should not happen. The switch back is not hitless.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-DX-EQPT::AID; on module to be replaced.

where: AID = Access Identifier of matrix module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::AID; on matrix module to be replaced.

where: AID = Access Identifier of matrix module to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Observe output. What is value of secondary state (SST)?

If SST is WRK, go to Step 5.
If SST is STBYH, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; on module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Observe output. Note service state.

If module is not OOS-MA, go to Step 10.
If module is OOS-MA, go to Step 17.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID; on module to be replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
Note:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against the matrix module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-34: PSF replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-34: PSF replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a Power Supply Filter (PSF).
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

In this procedure, the equipment address is 1-3-S, where S=equipment slot location
number in the shelf.
Prerequisites
Although this procedure is normally done to replace a failed (inactive) component,
always verify component state before removal.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Of the two PSF boards included in the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC), ensure the PSF
board that is not to be replaced is inserted, works properly, has no active alarms, and the
green LED light is on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure there are no alarms declared against the mate PSF board.
If there are alarms, refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
If there are no alarms, go to Step 4.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure there are no conditions declared against the mate PSF board.
If there are alarms, refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; on the mate PSF.

where: AID = Access Identifier of mate PSF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure mate PSF is in an IS state.

If mate PSF is in an IS state, go to Step 8.
If mate PSF is not in an IS state, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier for PSF to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID = Access Identifier for PSF to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Ensure PSF has a service state of OOS-MA or OOS-AU,FLT.

If service state is OOS-MA or OOS-AU,FLT, go to Step 11.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If service state is not OOS-MA or OOS-AU,FLT, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 NOTICE
If the step-up converter is left on, this can cause a flashover at the PSF board power
connectors or at the backpanel pins.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Switch off the step-up converter.

This cuts power to the PSF board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Disconnect the power cables from the front of the board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Unplug the PSF board and remove it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Insert the new PSF board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Plug in the new PSF board.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Connect the power cables on the front side of the new PSF board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Switch on the Step-Up Converter associated with the new PSF board.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; for the newly replaced PSF

where: AID = Access Identifier for the new PSF
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where AID = Access Identifier for new PSF
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Ensure new PSF is in an IS state.

If new PSF is in an IS state, go to Step 23.
If new PSF is not in an IS state, go to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Ensure there are no alarms declared against the PSF board.

If there are alarms, go to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are conditions, go to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Check that the green LEDs of both PSF boards are on.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a FAN.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Prerequisites
always verify component state before removal.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter RMV-EQPT::FAN-1-2-1:::FRCD;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Extract the FAN unit from the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) subrack.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Insert a new FAN into the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter RST-EQPT::FAN-1-2-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Check that the functionalities work correctly. (Green LED light on.)
Lower Fan
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RMV-EQPT::FAN-1-4-1:::FRCD;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Unscrew the dust filter grid from the FAN and remove it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Extract the FAN unit from the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert a new FAN into the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Re-connect the dust filter grid to the FAN unit.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Screw the dust filter grid back into place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Enter RST-EQPT::FAN-1-4-1;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Check that the functionalities work correctly. (Green LED light on.)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a faulty BUSTERM board with a new
working module.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

BUSTERM modules must be PN 3AL81209AA ICS 03 or later or PN 3AL81209AB ICS
01 or later.
Prerequisites
always verify component state before removal. Always contact the next level of technical
support before attempting this procedure.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to check and replace a FAN unit dust filter.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Loosen the screw securing the dust filter to the FAN shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Remove the filter from the FAN shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Is the dust filter dirty?

If the dust filter is dirty, go to Step 4.
If the dust filter is clean, go to Step 7.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Check that the protective adhesive film has been removed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the dirty dust filter from the FAN shelf and replace with a clean filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Replace the protective adhesive film removed before removal of the dust filter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Install the filter (PN: 3AG24354AA) into the FAN shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Tighten the screw securing the dust filter to the FAN shelf.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on cleaning the FAN unit protection.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 On the front of the FAN unit protection, loosen the screw securing it to the subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Gently remove the FAN unit protection from the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC)
subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Clean the FAN unit protection using appropriate tools.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Re-insert the FAN unit protection back into the 1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC)
subrack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Tighten the screw securing the unit to the subrack.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-39: 2-kW step-up converter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-39: 2-kW step-up converter replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing the step-up converter.
Related information
The 2-kW step-up converter supports systems with zero to four ES64SC modules.
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure the extractor for the XFP and step-up converter, PN 3AN 50032 AAAA, is
available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn power switch to OFF on the step-up converter associated with the PSF board
experiencing the problem/alarm.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure the red LED light is ON and the green LED light is OFF on the step-up converter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Loosen the screws holding the converter in place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Insert the extractor into the circular hole near the bottom of the step-up converter to be
replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Turn the extractor slightly a quarter turn to allow it to grab the step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Gently pull the step-up converter out of the slot to remove it.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 On the rear of the replacement 2-kW step-up converters, remove the wire jumper. See
Figure 3-7, “Step-up converter wire jumper removal detail” (p. 3-185).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-7 Step-up converter wire jumper removal detail
Wire Jumper
Installed;
Step-Up
Configured For
ETSI Power
Configuration
Wire Jumper
Removed;
Step-Up
Configured for
ANSI Power
Configuration
678-0342-1
060208
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Place the step-up converter into the slot just vacated by the removed Step-Up Converter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 NOTICE
Do not push directly on the FAN backing that is on the step-up converter. It will bend the
backing and the FAN will become inoperable.
Tighten the screws to secure the new step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Turn the power to the new step-up converter to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Ensure the green LED lights are ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Is there a PWR alarm?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-40: Clean fiber-optic connectors
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-40: Clean fiber-optic connectors

When to use
This procedure provides the recommended instructions to clean fiber-optic connectors
found in Alcatel-Lucent equipment.
Related information
location and address.
Before you begin

Prerequisite
Anyone who performs this procedure must be familiar with cleaning fiber-optic
connectors and with the specific system on which the procedure is to be performed.
This procedure must not be performed on traffic-carrying equipment. If a system is in
service, traffic must be removed from equipment to be cleaned.
Recommended tools
The following tools must be available for this procedure:
• Optical power meter with standard accessories
• Optical power meter adapter
– Spider, MPX-to-SC, 2-meter, single-mode, 8-fiber—AMP 492328-2
– Spider, MPX-to-SC, 2-meter, multimode, 8-fiber—AMP 97-A169-62-2
• Inspection microscope, 200X to 400X—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT200 or
AWT300
• Inspection microscope tip
– MPX tip—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT-MPX
– MPX backplane tip—Aerotech World Trade Ltd. AWT-MPXAPC
• Anti-static lint-free swab—Texwipe PN TX757E
• CLETOP®1fiber-optic cleaner, Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100500 for all
fiber-optic connectors except MPX and bulkhead type
• CLETOP® 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner- Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100400, box
of 200
• CLETOP® 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner - Aerotech World Trade Ltd. PN 14100401
box of 200
• Optical removal and cleaning tool—Alcatel-Lucent PN 3EM07060AAAA
• Penlight (pocket-style flashlight)
• Laser safety glasses
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If the cleaning method described in this procedure does not produce acceptable results,
connector may need to be replaced.
Task
DANGER
Laser hazard
Laser infrared radiation is present when fiber-optic connector is open and optical
interface is installed. Laser infrared radiation is not visible to naked eye or with laser
safety glasses
DO NOT LOOK INTO FIBER-OPTIC CONNECTOR.
DANGER
Laser hazard
Ensure no optical power is connected to fiber being tested. An optical power meter must
be used to ensure all optical power has been removed.
NOTICE
Do not disassemble modules to clean fibers. Disassembling module could cause damage
to optical splice and could void warranty.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NOTICE
To preserve integrity of fiber-optic connectors, observe the following precautions:
• Do not use cleaning swabs more than once.
• Do not use alcohol or any type of liquid to clean fiber-optic connectors.
• Do not use canned air to clean fiber-optic connectors. Canned air propellant leaves
residue that clouds fiber-optic connectors.
• Do not touch polished optical surface of fiber-optic connector. Oil from skin can
degrade performance of fiber-optic connector and attract dust particles.
• Always use protective covers to protect disconnected fiber-optic connectors. When
protective covers are not in use, store them in a clean container. Do not store
protective covers in clothes pocket.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Use optical power meter to determine if light is coming out of fiber-optic connector.
Figure 3-8 Fiber-optic connector inspection
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Does optical power meter detect light coming out of fiber-optic connector?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Find laser transmission source and disable it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Remove fiber-optic connector from receptacle, if necessary.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Use inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 3-8, “Fiber-optic
connector inspection” (p. 3-190) for examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Note that
MPX connector has multiple fibers. Use the following criteria to determine clean fiber:
1. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
2. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
3. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Is fiber-optic connector clean?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Select type of connector to clean. For illustrations and photographs of connector types,
see Figure 3-9, “Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations” (p. 3-192) and Figure 3-10,
“Fiber-optic connector types, photographs” (p. 3-193), respectively.
If non-backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector, go to Step 8.
If FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII fiber-optic connector, go to Step 10.
If backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector, go to Step 14.
If bulkhead connectors, go to Step 21.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-9 Fiber-optic connector types, illustrations
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Non-backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector

Do not touch tip of TX757E swab.
Use TX757E swab to clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping once between two
metal alignment pins, then discard swab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Go to Step 24.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-10 Fiber-optic connector types, photographs
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 FC, SC, MU, LC, or ST/STII Fiber-Optic Connector

Holding CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner with one hand, use metal lever to open metal slide
and expose cleaning surface. Do not release lever.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Place fiber ferrule firmly against CLETOP fiber-optic cleaner cleaning surface, rotate
ferrule 90 degrees, then gently wipe ferrule along cleaning surface one time in one
direction only.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Release metal lever.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Go to Step 24.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Backplane-mounted MPX fiber-optic connector

Do not touch tip of TX757E swab.
Insert swab handle into swab optical cleaning tool (extender). See Figure 3-11, “Optical
removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA)” (p. 3-196).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 NOTICE
Use care to prevent damaging backplane-mounted fiber-optic connector pins when
cleaning backplane-mounted fiber-optic connectors.
Use penlight to light backplane-mounted fiber-optic connector.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Is fiber-optic connector top mounted or bottom mounted?

If top mounted, go to Step 17.
If bottom mounted, go to Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping fiber ferrule once from top to bottom,
discard TX757E swab, then go to Step 19.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Clean fiber-optic connector by gently wiping fiber ferrule once from bottom to top,
discard TX757E swab, then go to Step 19.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Insert TX757E swab into bulkhead (barrel) receptacle and rotate swab, sliding it in and
out to clean inside of receptacle, then discard swab.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Go to Step 24.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-11 Optical removal and cleaning tool (PN 3EM07060AAAA)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Bulkhead Connectors
Select appropriate CLETOP Stick-Type to clean bulkhead connector for fiber optic
connection.
1. For FC, SC and ST bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 2.5mm Stick-Type cleaner
2. For LC and MU bulkhead connectors use the CLETOP 1.25mm Stick-Type cleaner
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Insert CLETOP swab into the optical bulkhead adapter and gently twist/wipe to clean
fiber-optic interface. Discard swab after each use.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Are there more fiber optic bulkheads to clean?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Inspect connector
Use inspection microscope to inspect fiber-optic connector. See Figure 3-8, “Fiber-optic
connector inspection” (p. 3-190) for examples of clean and contaminated fibers. Note that
MPX connector has multiple fibers. Use the following criteria to determine clean fiber:
1. Fiber core must have no contaminants or defects.
2. Fiber cladding must have no contaminants. Minor defects (pits and scratches) are
acceptable.
3. Fiber ferrule may not have contaminants or defects that interfere with fiber-optic
connector mating.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Clean and inspect fiber-optic connector up to five more times.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If no, contact next level of support.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Remove permanent plastic cap retainer, if applicable. Follow customer practices.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Are there more fiber-optic connectors to clean?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-41: ES64SC replacement in a protected
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-41: ES64SC replacement in a protected

configuration
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace an ES64SC module in a protected
configuration. Replacement of an unprotected ES64SC is service-affecting. See Procedure
3-42: “ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration” (p. 3-202)
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID; on module to be replaced.

where: AID = Access Identifier of ES64SC module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. What is state of ES64SC module to replace?

If IS,WRK go to Step 4.
If IS,STBYH or OOS-AU, go to Step 6.
If OOS-MA, go to Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID; to switch ES64SC to standby.

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID; for ES64SC being replaced.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Remove ES64SC. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Install replacement ES64SC. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; for module just installed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::AID; for replacement ES64SC to verify operation of new ES64SC.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Was switch successful?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-42: ES64SC replacement in an unprotected
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-42: ES64SC replacement in an unprotected

configuration
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a failed ES64SC provisioned to operate in
an unprotected configuration (simplex mode). For ES64SCs operating in a protected
configuration (active/standby mode see Procedure 3-41: “ES64SC replacement in a
protected configuration” (p. 3-199). Replacement of an unprotected ES64SC is
service-affecting. This procedure is to be performed in order to preserve a correct
ES64SC database and avoid potential shelf disruptions.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Enter RTRV-DB-LABEL; to verify that a current database backup is available that can be
used in the unlikely event that the flash card on the failed ES64SC is defective.
If a current database backup is available, go to Step 2.
If no current database backup is available, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Manually remove the card by entering RMV-EQPT::AID; for the ES64SC to be replaced.
where: AID = Access Identifier of ES64SC to manually remove the
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. What is the primary state of the ES64SC to be replaced?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If it is OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA, go to Step 4.
If it is not OOS-MA or OOS-AUMA, go to Step 13.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Unplug the failed ES64SC if it is still present and remove the compact flash card. Refer to
Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and replacement” (p. 3-130).
The compact flash card is located at the bottom of the ES64SC. Orient the card in the
direction of the ES64SC in Figure 3-12, “Location of the compact flash card on the
ES64SC” (p. 3-203) and you will find the flash card by the orange arrow.
Figure 3-12 Location of the compact flash card on the ES64SC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-13 Compact flash card removed from the ES64SC
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Remove the compact flash card from the replacement ES64SC (by sliding the compact
flash card out) and lay it aside. Remove the flash card from the failed ES64SC and insert
this compact flash card from the failed ES64SC card (by sliding the flash compact card
in) into the replacement ES64SC.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Plug the replacement ES64SC into the slot vacated by the old ES64SC. Refer to
Result: On startup, the ES64SC downloads the latest firmware from the FLC and
restores the database from the compact flash card.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Enter RTRV-COND-EQPT::AID; to verify that the ES64SC has properly started from the
restored database.
where: AID = Access Identifier of ES64SC
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
configuration
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Observe output. Are there any conditions reported that prevent from continuing?
If no, go to Step 9 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter RST-EQPT::AID; to logically restore the ES64SC just installed.

where: AID = Access Identifier of ES64SC
Result: The primary state for this ES64SC turns to IS or OOS-AU.
If the state is OOS-AU, FLT, go to Step 13. Place the compact flash card that came
with the spare into the failed ES64SC and return the failed unit for repair.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 If an old database backup was discovered in Step 1, proceed to Step 11. Otherwise the
procedure is complete.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Do this step only if the backup in Step 1 was found to be out of date.
Enter ACT-DB-BACKUP; to perform a backup of the primary backup database (ACT DSK
DB) to the secondary backup database (STBYDB) on the FLC and monitor for successful
completion.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Was replacement successful?

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing an RAU.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Turn power switch to OFF on the RAU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Ensure the green LED light is OFF on the RAU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Loosen the screws holding the RAU in place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Gently pull the RAU out of the slot to remove it.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Place the new RAU into the slot just vacated by the removed RAU.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Tighten the screws to secure the new RAU.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Turn the power to the new RAU to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Ensure the green LED light is ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing a BYPASS.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Turn power switch to OFF on the BYPASS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Loosen the screws holding the BYPASS in place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Gently pull the BYPASS out of the slot to remove it.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Place the new BYPASS into the slot just vacated by the removed BYPASS.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Tighten the screws to secure the new BYPASS.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Turn the power to the new BYPASS to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-45: Gigabit Ethernet card replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-45: Gigabit Ethernet card replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a Gigabit Ethernet module (P8GEFC,
P16GEFC).
Related information
location and address. It is possible that the gigabit ethernet card has LAG or path
protection. For Gigabit Ethernet modules without LAG or path protection on all port(s),
traffic will be dropped while performing this procedure. For information on TL1
command syntax, refer to the 1678 MCC TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

Gigabit Ethernet cards have no equipment protection on the 1678 Metro Core Connect
(MCC). It is possible the Gigabit Ethernet card has LAG or path protection. For
configurations configured with LAG path protection contact the next level of technical
support.
Task
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure the extractor for the SFP, PN 3AL 81424 AAAA, is available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Is the Gigabit Ethernet card to be replaced configured with LAG or path protection?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 NOTICE
ESD hazard
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Enter RTRV-COND-ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 NOTICE
Possibility of service interruption. If the protection facility of LAG protected ports is also
in alarm or declaring conditions and/or not available for protection, do not continue with
procedure.
Enter RTRV-EQPT::AID;
where: AID = Access Identifier of module to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter RMV-EQPT::AID::FRCD;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Enter RTRV-GBE::AID;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14
Insert the extractor into the first SFP on the failed module.
The extractor will lock into place when it is secure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Push the lever in on the left side of the extractor to unlock the SFP from the socket.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Gently pull the SFP out of the slot and remove it from the module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Place the SFP into the appropriate slot on the replacement module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Repeat Step 14 through Step 17 for all SFPs on the failed module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Replace the module. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are alarms, refer to Step 27.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-46: 2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter upgrade
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-46: 2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter upgrade

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on upgrading from the 2-kW step-up converter to the
2.2-kW step-up converter.
Related information
TL1 Command Guide.
Before you begin

The 2-kW step-up converter supports systems with zero to four ES64SC modules. The
2.2-kW step-up converter supports all system configurations and is required in systems
with five or more ES64SC modules.
During this procedure the step-up converter, PSF module, and the power cables will be
replaced.
Prerequisites
• The redundant step-up converters must be configured properly.
• No power related alarms standing on the system prior to beginning this procedure.
Required tools and equipment
• (2) 2.2-kW step-up converters (PN 3AL89590AF)
• (2) PSF modules (PN 3AL81502AB)
• Power cable, A-side (red) (PN 3AG24591AA)
• Power cable, B-side (blue) (PN 3AG24591AB)
• Extractor tool (PN 3AN50031AAAA)
• Screwdriver, Phillips, #1
• Screwdriver, slotted, small
• Side cutters
• Tie wraps or lace cord
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Verify existing step-up converters are configured properly, in a redundant power scheme.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Are step-up converters configured in a redundant power scheme?

If no, stop this procedure immediately. Upon resolution of improperly configured step-up
converters, perform this procedure in its entirety
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Are there any power related alarms present preventing PSUP converter upgrade?
If yes, stop this procedure immediately. Refer to “Alarm and event condition clearing
procedures” (p. 3-4) and clear all power related alarms. Then perform this procedure in its
entirety.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Ensure the extractor for the step-up converter, PN 3AN 50032 AAAA, is available.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Turn the B 2-kW step-up converter, located in slot 2, power switch to OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Ensure the red LED light is ON and the green LED light is OFF on the B 2-kW step-up
converterr.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Loosen the screws holding the 2-kW step-up converter, located in slot 2, in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Insert the extractor into the circular hole near the bottom of the B 2-kW step-up converter,
located in slot 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 Turn the extractor a quarter turn to allow it to grab the B2 -kW step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Gently slide the B 2-kW step-up converter out of slot 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Loosen the screws securing the PSF module in slot 25.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Unseat the PSF module in slot 25 using module ejector handle.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Disconnect the power cable from the front of the PSF module in slot 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Gently slide the PSF module out of slot 25.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Disconnect the B power cable from the NGTRU panel connector M11.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Undress and remove the B power cable from the right side of the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Dress the new B (blue) power cable (PN 3AG24591AB) along the right side of the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 On the rear of the replacement B 2.2-kW step-up converter (PN3AL89590AD), toggle the
Input Threshold switch to the ANSI position. See Figure 3-14, “2.2-kW step-up converter
switch settings” (p. 3-217).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 On the rear of the replacement B 2.2-kW step-up converter, toggle the No Load Sense
switch to the ON position. See Figure 3-14, “2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings”
(p. 3-217).
Figure 3-14 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings
LEGEND:
1. INPUT THRESHOLD:
ANSI / ETSI
2. NO LOAD SENSE:
ON / OFF
678-0341-1
060208
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Slide the replacement B 2.2-kW step-up converter into slot 2, vacated in Step 11 but do
not seat the module at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Connect and secure the B (blue) power cable to the top of the B2.2-kW step-up converter,
located in slot 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
23 Slide the new PSF module (PN 3AL81502AB) into slot 25, but do not seat the module at
this time.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Connect and secure the other end of the B power cable to the front of the PSF module in
slot 25.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
25 Secure the B power cable to the rack and to the NGTRU panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Seat the PSF module located in slot 25.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
27 Tighten the screws securing the PSF module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Seat the B 2.2-kW step-up converter , located in slot 2.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 NOTICE
Tighten the screws to secure the B 2.2-kW step-up converter , located in slot 2.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
30 Turn the B 2.2-kW step-up converter , located in slot 2, power switch to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
31 Ensure the green LED lights on both the step-up converter and PSF modules are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
34 Turn the A 2-kW step-up converter, located in slot 1, power switch to OFF.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
35 Ensure the red LED light is ON and the green LED light is OFF on the A 2-kW step-up
converter, located in slot 1.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
36 Loosen the screws securing the A 2-kW step-up converter located in slot 1 in place.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Insert the extractor into the circular hole near the bottom of the A 2-kW step-up converter,
located in slot 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
38 Turn the extractor a quarter turn to allow it to grab the A 2-kW step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
39 Gently slide the A 2-kW step-up converter out of slot 1.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Loosen the screws securing the PSF module in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
41 Unseat the PSF module in slot 24 using module ejector handle.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Disconnect the power cable from the front of the PSF module in slot 24.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
43 Gently slide the PSF module out of slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
44 Disconnect the A power cable from the NGTRU panel connector M10.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
45 Undress and remove the A power cable from the left side of the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46 Dress the new A (red) power cable (PN 3AG24591AA) along the left side of the rack.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 On the rear of the replacement A 2.2-kW step-up converter (PN3AL89590AD), toggle the
Input Threshold switch to the ANSI position. See Figure 3-14, “2.2-kW step-up converter
switch settings” (p. 3-217).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
48 On the rear of the replacement A 2.2-kW step-up converter, toggle the No Load Sense
(p. 3-217).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
49 Slide the replacement A 2.2-kW step-up converter into slot 1, vacated in Step 39 but do
not seat the module at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
50 Connect and secure the A (red) power cable to the top of the 2.2-kW step-up converter,
located in slot 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
51 Slide the new PSF module (PN 3AL81502AB) into slot 24 but do not seat the module at
this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
52 Connect and secure the other end of the A (red) power cable to the front of the PSF
module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53 Secure the A (red) power cable to the rack and to the NGTRU panel.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
54 Seat the PSF module located in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
55 Tighten the screws securing the PSF module in slot 24.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
56 Seat the A 2.2-kW step-up converter into slot 1,

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
57 NOTICE
Tighten the screws to secure the new A 2.2-kW step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
58 Turn the A 2.2-kW step-up converter's, located in slot 1, power switch to ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
59 Ensure the green LED lights on both the step-up converter and PSF modules are ON.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-47: 2.2 kW step-up converter replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-47: 2.2 kW step-up converter replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions on replacing the 2.2-kW step-up converter.
Related information
The 2.2-kW step-up converterr supports all system configurations and is required in
systems with five or more ES64SC modules.
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
WARNING
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Ensure the extractor for the 2.2-kW step-up converter, PN 3AN 50032 AAAA, is
available.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Turn power switch to OFF on the 2.2-kW step-up converter associated with the PSF
board experiencing the problem/alarm.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Ensure the red LED light is ON and the green LED light is OFF on the 2.2-kW step-up
converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Loosen the screws holding the converter in place.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 Insert the extractor into the circular hole near the bottom of the 2.2-kW step-up converter
to be replaced.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Lift up the module removal tab and gently pull the 2.2-kW step-up converter to unseat the
2.2-kW step-up converter. Do not remove the 2.2-kW step-up converter at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Disconnect the cable attached to the top of the 2.2-kW step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Slide the 2.2-kW step-up converter out of the shelf.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 On the rear of the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter, toggle the Input Threshold
switch to the ANSI position. See Figure 3-15, “2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings”
(p. 3-224).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
10 On the rear of the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter, toggle the No Load Sense
(p. 3-224).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Figure 3-15 2.2-kW step-up converter switch settings
LEGEND:
1. INPUT THRESHOLD:
ANSI / ETSI
2. NO LOAD SENSE:
ON / OFF
678-0341-1
060208
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Slide the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter into the slot just vacated by the removed
2.2-kW step-up converter but do not seat the unit at this time.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Connect the cable removed in Step 7 to the top of the replacement 2.2-kW step-up
converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Seat the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 NOTICE
Do not push directly on the FAN backing that is on the 2.2 kW step-up converter. It will
bend the backing and the FAN will become inoperable.
Tighten the screws to secure the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Turn the power to the replacement 2.2-kW step-up converter to ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Ensure the green LED lights are ON.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-48: 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-48: 10 Gigabit Ethernet card replacement

When to use
This procedure provides instructions to replace a 10 Gigabit Ethernet module (P2XGE).
Related information
10 Gigabit Ethernet modules have no equipment protection on the 1678 Metro Core
Connect (MCC). It is possible the 10 Gigabit Rthernet module has LAG or path
protection. For 10 Gigabit Ethernet modules without LAG or path protection on either or
both port(s), traffic will be dropped while performing this procedure. For configurations
configured with LAG path protection contact the next level of technical support.
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 Is the 10 Gigabit Ethernet card to be replaced configured with LAG or path protection?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
5 NOTICE
If the protection facility of LAG protected ports is also in alarm or declaring conditions
and/or not available for protection, do not continue with procedure.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
6 Enter RTRV-EQPT::P2XGE-AID;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of module to be replaced
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If service state is not IS, go to Step 30..
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 NOTICE
When the RMV-EQPT command is issued, traffic carried on both ports will be dropped if
no protection is configured.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
9 Enter RMV-EQPT::P2XGE-AID::FRCD;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of I/O module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Enter RTRV-EQPT::P2XGE-AID;
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
14 Remove the module. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Release the XFP latch for the XFP to be removed.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
16 Gently pull the XFP out of the module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Place the XFP into the replacement module.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Ensure the XFP latch clicks, securing the XFP.

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
19 Repeat Step 15 through Step 18 if the module is equipped with two XFPs.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
20 Replace the module. Refer to Procedure 3-27: “Module mechanical removal and
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Enter RST-EQPT::P2XGE-AID; on newly inserted module.

where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter RTRV-EQPT::P2XGE-AID; on newly inserted module.

where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
If there are alarms, refer to Step 28.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures Procedure 3-49: MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Procedure 3-49: MX320GA to MX640GA in-service matrix

upgrade procedure
When to use
This procedure provides instructions to upgrade the MX320GA matrix in-service to the
MX640GA matrix.
Related information
During the matrix upgrade procedure, while the system is in a mixed matrix
configuration, the MXUPGRD condition will be set. The MXUPGRD condition will be
raised after the ED-EQPT command is issued against the first matrix upgraded. The
MXUPGRD condition will clear after the ED-EQPT command is issued against the
second matrix upgraded.
If a back out of the matrix upgrade procedure is required, go to the section titled
“MX320GA to MX640 In-Service Matrix Back Out Procedure”.
TL1 Command Guide.
Task
NOTICE
ESD hazard
NOTICE
Unplugging a matrix board while it is active causes traffic interruption of less than
50 ms.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
1 MX320GA to MX640 in-service matrix upgrade procedure

Are there standing conditions present which prevent performing the MX320GA to
MX640GA matrix upgrade procedure?
If yes, go to “Alarm and event condition clearing procedures” (p. 3-4) and clear all
standing conditions present preventing the MX320GA to MX640GA matrix upgrade.
Then perform this procedure from the beginning.
If no, go to Step 2 .
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
2 Enter RTRV-EQPT::ALL;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
3 Observe output. Determine AID of the matrix module with PST of IS, STBYH.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
4 Enter INH-SWDX-EQPT::MX320GA-1-3-10;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
7 Observe output, is the INHSWDX condition type set?

If no, repeat Step 6 and Step 7 until INHSWDX is set, if after waiting 5 minutes, go to
Step 86.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
8 Enter RMV-EQPT::MX320GA-AID;
where: AID=Access Identifier of matrix module with PST equal IS, STBYH
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
11 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX320GA module logically removed in Step 8
OOS, MA?
Note: This is the first back out point for the MX320 to MX640 Matrix Upgrade
Procedure. If back out of the MX320 to MX640 Matrix Upgrade Procedure is
required, go to the section titled “MX320GA to MX640 In-Service Matrix Back Out
Procedure”, contained within Procedure 3-49: “MX320GA to MX640GA in-service
matrix upgrade procedure” (p. 3-230).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
12 Unseat and remove the MX320GA module logically removed in Step 8. Refer to
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
13 Enter ED-EQPT::MX320GA-AID::::PROVISIONEDTYPE=MX640GA;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of matrix module logically removed in Step 8.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
15 Insert and seat the MX640GA module into the slot vacated in Step 12. Refer to Procedure
3-27: “Module mechanical removal and replacement” (p. 3-130).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
17 Observe output, wait for all alarms to clear except MAN, INHSWDX, MXUPGRD.
Have all alarms cleared except MAN, INHSWDX, MXUPGRD?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, repeat Step 16 and Step 17 until all expected alarms clear, if after waiting 10
minutes, go to Step 86.
Note: This is the second back out point for the MX320 to MX640 Matrix Upgrade
required, go to the section titled “MX320GA to MX640 In-Service Matrix Back Out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
18 Enter RST-EQPT::MX640GA-AID;
where: AID=Access Identifier of matrix module inserted in Step 15.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
21 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX640GA module restored in Step 18 IS,
STBYH?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
22 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::MX640-AID
where : AID = Access Identifier of the matrix module restored in Step 18.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
24 Enter SW-DX-EQPT::MX640GA-AID;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of matrix module restored in Step 18
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
26 Wait for the system to generate REPT^SW autonomous message before proceeding. If the
system does not generate REPT^SW autonomous message within 5 minutes, go to Step
86.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
28 Observe output. Note service state of both matrix modules, is MX640GA module IS,
WRK and MX320GA IS, STBYH.
Note: This is the third back out point for the MX320 to MX640 Matrix Upgrade
required, go to the section titled“ MX320GA to MX640 In-Service Matrix Back Out
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
29 Enter INH-SWDX-EQPT::MX640GA-AID;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of the matrix module restored in Step 18
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
32 Observe output, is the INHSWDX condition type set?

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
If no, repeat Step 31 and Step 32 until INHSWDX is set, if after waiting 5 minutes, go to
Step 86.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=Access Identifier of MX320 matrix module with PST equal IS, STBYH
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
WRK and MX320GA OOS-MA.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
37 Unseat and remove the MX320GA module logically removed in Step 33. Refer to
Note: NOTE: This is the final back out point for the MX320 to MX640 Matrix
Upgrade Procedure. If back out of the MX320 to MX640 Matrix Upgrade Procedure
is required, go to the section titled “MX320GA to MX640 In-Service Matrix Back out
matrix upgrade procedure” (p. 3-230). After completing Step 38, back out of the
matrix upgrade is not supported.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID=Access Identifier of matrix module to be upgraded second
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

If COMPLD, go to Step 40..
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
40 Insert the MX640GA module into the slot vacated in Step 37. Refer to Procedure 3-27:
“Module mechanical removal and replacement” (p. 3-130).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
42 Observe output, wait for all alarms to clear except MAN, INHSWDX. Have all alarms
cleared except MAN, INHSWDX?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID=Access Identifier of matrix module inserted in Step 40
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
46 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX640GA module restored in Step 43 IS,
STBYH?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
47 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::MX640GA-AID;
where:
AID=Access Identifier of the WRK matrix module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=Access Identifier of the WRK matrix module
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
86.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
53 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against either matrix module.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
54 MX320GA to MX640 in-service matrix back out procedure

After which step is back out of the MX320GA to MX640GA Matrix growth procedure
required?
If after Step 37, go to Step 55.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
55 Insert and seat the MX320GA module into the vacated slot in Step 37. Refer to Procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
57 Observe output, wait for all alarms to clear except MAN, INHSWDX, and MXUPGRD.
Have all alarms cleared except MAN, INHSWDX, and MXUPGRD?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where: AID=Access Identifier of matrix module inserted in Step 55
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
61 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX320GA module restored in Step 58
IS,STBYH?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
86.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
STBYH and MX320GA IS, WRK.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
70 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX640GA module logically removed in Step 67
IS, STBYH?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
71 Unseat and remove the MX640GA module physically installed in Step 15. Refer to
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AID=Access Identifier of matrix module physically removed in Step 71
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
74 Insert and seat the MX320GA module into the slot vacated in Step 71. Refer to Procedure
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
76 Observe output, wait for all alarms to clear except MAN, INHSWDX. Have all alarms
cleared except MAN, INHSWDX?
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
where:
AID=Access Identifier of matrix module logically removed in Step 8 or 65
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
80 Observe output. Is the PST value of the MX320GA module restored in Step 77
IS,STBYH?
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
81 Enter ALW-SWDX-EQPT::MX320GA-1-3-10;
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
84 Ensure there are no alarms or conditions declared against either matrix module.
procedures” (p. 3-4) to clear the alarms or conditions. Then go to Step 85.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................
85 Resolve all issues that required the matrix upgrade procedure to be halted. Upon
successful resolution of all issues, the matrix upgrade procedure must be performed in it’s
entirety. Go to Step 87.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................

...................................................................................................................................................................................................

E...................................................................................................................................................................................................
N D O F S T E P S
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
upgrade procedure
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Numerics
1:1
A 1:N system where N=1.
1+1, 1P1
Non-expandable protection scheme; (Pronounced “one plus one”). Two full-duplex channels: one
active, one standby; either can provide service. Protection switching behavior may be revertive or
nonrevertive (normal case). When active channel fails, traffic is switched to standby channel. In
revertive, one channel is the preferred active; when preferred channel is repaired, traffic switches
back to it. In nonrevertive neither channel is preferred, and switch-back does not occur.
1:N
(Pronounced “one for N”) N+1 full-duplex channels, N main and one standby (or protection). The
main channels provide service: If a main channel fails, the standby channel switches to provide
service in place of failed channel. Switching is revertive, which permits extra traffic to be carried
on the standby channel. (For example, when the main channel is repaired, service will be switched
back to it, thus making the standby channel available to protect a subsequent failure.)
2FBLSR
Two-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).
2SR
2 Second Response.
42S
40-input to 20-output switch ASIC.
4FBLSR
Four-Fiber Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).
802.1E
An IEEE protocol that allows the loading of a file on an NE on a multicast or point-to-point basis
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
A ABAM
A four-digit cable identification code for T1-compatible 22 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper
wire, a standard for paired copper cabling.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary GL-1
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ABN
Abnormal alarm.
ABN CONFG
Abnormal Configuration.
ABT
Abort Output Function.
ABTM
A four-digit cable identification code for T1-compatible 26 American Wire Gauge (AWG) copper
wire; standard for paired copper cabling.
Access Identifier (AID)

Specifies the object entity (port or equipment) specified in a TL1 command; used to specify
“object entities” within an NE to which user commands are to be applied. Facilities and signals
are examples of object entities. The term “object entity” is used by Bellcore; it does not mean the
NE is implemented in an object-oriented manner.
ACD
Alcatel Control Domain
ACL
Administration Communication Link. An RS-485 signal level bus for communication between the
APS and all SI48 and matrix shelves. Up to 2 Mb/s half-duplex communication link; implements
HDLC-NRM multidrop communication configuration; supports up to 2000 feet bus length; and
consists of transmit data, receive data, clock, reset enable, and CPI.
ACM
Administrative Communications Module (module).
ACO
See Alarm Cutoff (ACO).
ACSE
Association Control Service Element. An OSI convention used to establish, maintain, or terminate
a connection between two applications.
ACT
1. Active redundant.
2. Active unit.
3. Active secondary service state; indicates that the entity is capable of being protected and is
currently the active entity.
Action Button
A pushbutton common to 1301 Network Manager (NM) dialog boxes.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GL-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ACU
Alarm Communications Unit.
Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM)

Network elements that provide access to all N, or some subset M of Synchronous Transport
Signal (STS) line signals contained within an OC-N optical channel. (M is a standard hierarchical
level vN.) STSs are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it
passes through the ADM. ADMs include linear applications between terminals (referred to as a
Linear ADM or LADM) and ring network applications (referred to as unidirectional ring [uniring]
and bidirectional ring [bi-ring] ADMs). See also Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).
ADDR
Address.
ADL
1. Add-Drop Linear. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).
2. Asynchronous Data Link
ADL12
Add-Drop Linear for OC12. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).
ADM
See Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).
ADMIN
Administrative domain server.
Administration
A 1301 Network Manager (NM) main menu option; displays the general status and inventory of a
system.
Administrator
A user who has access to all security, system, and database maintenance functions in addition to
standard user capabilities.
ADR
Add-Drop Ring.
ADR12
Add-Drop Ring for OC12.
ADSL
See Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL).
AFI
Address Format Identifier.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AGC
Automatic Gain Control.
AIC
Application Identification Channel. Identifies DS3 frame application (C-bit=1, W23=alternate 0s
and 1s).
AID
See Access Identifier (AID).
AINS
Automatic In Service.
AIS
See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
AISL
Alarm Indication Signal, Line. See Alarm Indication Signal (AIS).
AISS
AIS Second.
AIU
Attachment User Interface.
Alarm (ALM)
Binary visual or audible indication of trouble, significant number of irregularities, or failure;
signifies a malfunction or abnormality within the communications equipment; usually classified
as minor, major, or critical.
Alarm Cutoff (ACO)

An ACO silences an office alarm.
Alarm Indication
Indication of upstream transmission span failure. In a network of tandem maintenance spans,
service-affecting failures may occur, which disrupt normal signals and cause the generation of
maintenance alarms.
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS)

A unique line signal sent downstream in a digital network to indicate that an upstream failure is
detected and alarmed. Signal replaces normal traffic when a maintenance alarm is activated. There
are two types: American (framed; alternating 1s and 0s) and nonstandard (unframed; all 1s).
Alarm Log
Record of recent alarm events logged for a particular Network Element (NE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alarm/Condition Codes
1. Critical (CR) or (CRI)*.
2. In service (IS).
3. Maintenance (MAINT) or (MT).
4. Major (MAJ) or (MJ)*.
5. Manual control (ManCont).
6. Manual operation (MAN).
7. Memory administration (MA)*.
8. Minor (MN) or (MIN)*.
9. Out of Service (OOS).
* Also referred to as Severity level or Notification Code.
ALC
1. Automatic Level Control.
2. Automatic Laser Control.
ALM
See Alarm (ALM).
ALMAP
Alcatel Management Platform
ALMID
Alarm Identifier, parallel E2A.
ALS
Automatic Laser Shutdown.
ALSP
AIS or LOP-Path Second.
ALTAID
Alternate Equipment Access Identifier.
Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI)

1. Line coding format in T-1 transmission systems, whereby successive ones (marks) are
alternately inverted (sent with polarity opposite that of the preceding mark).
2. A line code that uses a ternary signal to convey binary digits; successive binary ones are
represented by signal elements normally of alternating, positive/negative polarity but equal in
amplitude, and in which binary zeros are represented by signal elements with zero amplitude
(an AT&T definition).
AMI
See Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AMR
Alternate Mark Inversion.
ANS
Alcatel Network Systems, Inc., now known as Alcatel USA.
ANSAID
Alcatel Network Systems, Inc. equipment Access Identifier.
AOD
Automatic Offline Diagnostics.
AOW
Analog Orderwire. See Order Wire, Orderwire (OW).
AP
Administrative Processor (generic term for an APS).
APD
Avalanche Photodiode.
API
Application Programming Interface
APM
Administrative Processing System, Minor.
APP
1. Application software kit.
2. ACL Patch Panel (module).
Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC)

A chip built for a specific application and used by manufacturers to consolidate many chips into a
single package, reducing system board size and power consumption. Many video boards and
modems use ASICs. ASICs span Programmable Array Logic (PAL) devices, Electrically
Programmable Logic Devices (ELPDs), Field-programmable Gate Arrays (PPGAs), standard
cell-based devices, and full custom-designed Integrated Circuits (ICs).
APR
Alarm Processing Remote.
APS
1. Automatic Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).
2. Administrative Processing System.
APSB
Automatic Protection Switching Byte. See Protection Switching (PS).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
APSCM
Automatic Protection Switching Channel Mismatch. See also Protection Switching (PS).
APSCONF
Automatic Protection Switching Configuration error. See also Protection Switching (PS).
APSD
Automatic Power Shutdown.
APSI
Automatic Protection Switching Inhibit. See also Protection Switching (PS).
Arrow Keys
Collective name used for up, down, left, and right cursor-moving keys, designated with
directional arrows.
AS
1. Assigned
2. Alarm Surveillance
AS&C
Alarm, Surveillance & Control. Part of the TABS protocol for the general telemetry processor.
ASAM
ATM Subscriber Access Multiplexer. (Also called Digital Subscriber Line Access Multiplexer
[DSLAM].)
ASE
Amplifier Spontaneous Emission.
ASIC
See Application-Specific Integrated Circuit (ASIC).
ASN.1
Abstract Syntax Notation One. Replacement syntax for TL1 used for machine-to-machine
communications.
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line (ADSL)

An evolving high-speed transmission technology originally developed by Bellcore; now
standardized by American National Standards Institute (ANSI) as T1.413; European Technical
Standards Committee (ETSI) contributed an annex to the standards to reflect European
requirements. ADSL uses existing Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) copper wires from the
telephone company Central Office (CO) to the subscriber premises; involves electronic equipment
(ADSL modems) at the CO and subscriber premises; and sends high-speed digital signals up and
down those copper wires, sending more information one way the other, hence the term
asymmetric.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Asynchronous mode
Bytes are sent without clocking information. Each byte is identified by a start bit and terminated
by one or more stop bits.
Asynchronous signal
A digital signal in which there is no common clock. Timing must be recovered from information
sent within signal.
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

A multiplexing/switching technique that organizes information into fixed-length cells with each
cell consisting of an identification header field and an information field; the transfer mode is
asynchronous in that the recurrence of cells depends on the required or instantaneous bit rate. See
also Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB).
ATAG
Autonomous Message Tag; an automatically generated tag for autonomous reports.
ATM
See Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
ATO
Assemble To Order.
Attribute(s)
1. Constitutes a specific property about an object.
2. The form of information items provided by the X.500 Directory Service; directory
information base consists of entries, each having one or more attributes; each attribute has a
type identifier together with one or more values.
3. MS-DOS file information, indicating whether file is read-only, hidden, or system, and
whether it has been changed since it was last backed up.
AU
Administrative Unit, SDH term.
AUD
Audible alarm.
AUG
Administrative Unit Group, SDH term.
AUI
Attachment Unit Interface.
AUXINV
Auxiliary Inventory (equipment).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
AWG
American Wire Gauge.
AXM
SX Administrative Cross-connect Manager Subsystem.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
B B3ZS
1. Bipolar with 3 Zero Substitution. The line code used in DS3 transmission systems. This code
follows the bipolar rule; however, when three consecutive zeroes occur, the three zeroes are
replaced with a unique code that contains bipolar violations in a defined manner.
2. Bipolar 3-Zero Substitution (DS3/STS1). See also Bipolar Signal.
B8ZS
Bipolar 8-Zero Substitution (DS1). See Bipolar Signal.
Bandwidth
Capacity of a network element allocated to a user.
BAR
Base Address Register.
Basic Rate Interface (BRI)

Two 64 Kb/s B channels and one 16 Kb/s D channel comprise BRI and yield a total of 144 Kb/s.
The B channels send data; the D channel sends signaling information for routing data coming in
over the B channels. BRI enables users to talk on the telephone and send email messages
simultaneously. BRI users must be within 3.4 miles of the Central Office (CO) offering BRI or the
telephone company would have to use repeater equipment to boost the signal. Compare with
Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
Baud
Specifies bit rate at which CPORT operates. This parameter is applicable only to USI type ports
because X.25 connections are synchronous.
Bayonet Neill Concelman (BNC)

A connector for coaxial cable such as that used for some video connections and RG58
connections. A BNC connector has a bayonet-type shell with two small knobs on the female
connector that lock into spiral slots in the male connector when it is twisted on. (Different sources
expand BNC as Bayonet Navy Connector, British Naval Connector, or Bayonet Nut Connection.)
BDLA
Bidirectional Line Amplifier. See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).
BER
See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BER-HT
Bit Error Ratio-High Threshold. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
BER-LT
Bit Error Ratio-Low Threshold. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
BERL
Bit Error Ratio, Line. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
BERP
Bit Error Ratio, Path. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
BFL
Baffle assembly.
Bi-Ring
Bidirectional Line-Switched Ring (BLSR). See Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring).
Bidirectional Coupler (optical)

A device that combines transmit and receive optical signals within a single fiber.
Bidirectional Ring (Bi-Ring)

A Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) ring network configuration in which traffic between
any two nodes flows in a single path between the two nodes. The other path around the ring is
used for protection purposes, providing high reliability. Bi-rings allow reuse of bandwidth around
the ring (unlike a unidirectional ring) but are technically much more complicated to protect.
Bidirectional Switching
The protection switching scheme in which both paths of the duplex channel are switched to the
protection path when either fails.
BIP
See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).
BIP-N
See Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).
BIPL
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Line. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).
Bipolar Signal
1. A 3-level digital signal in which logic 1 bits are pulses (typically RZ) which alternate in
polarity, and logic 0 bits are 0 volts. The resulting waveform has a dc level of 0 volts. Also
referred to as AMI.
2. A signal having two non-zero polarities. It must have two-state or three-state binary coding
scheme; is usually symmetrical with respect to zero amplitude.
Bipolar Violation (BPV)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
The presence of two consecutive same-polarity one bits on the T carrier line.
BIPS
Bit Interleaved Parity errors, Section. See Parity Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N).
BIST
Built-in Self Test
Bit
Binary digit; smallest unit of data in a data stream. The amount of information obtained by asking
a yes-or-no question; a computational quantity that can take on one of two values: true and false
or 0 and 1; the smallest unit of storage, sufficient to hold one bit. A bit is set if its value is true or
1, and reset or clear if its value is false or 0. Regarding setting and clearing bits: To toggle or
invert a bit changes it (from 0 to 1 or from 1 to 0).
Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER)

Rate at which errors occur in a digital signal divided by the number of transmitted bits. See also
Severely Errored Seconds (SES) and Signal Fail (SF).
Bit Interleaved Parity-N (BIP-N)

Method of error monitoring. If even parity is used, the transmitting equipment generates an N-bit
code over a specified portion of the first bit of all N-bit sequences in the covered portion of the
signal, and the second bit provides even parity over the second bits of all N-bit sequences within
the specified portion, etc. Even parity is generated by setting the BIP-N bits so that there is an
even number of ones in each of all N-bit sequences including the BIP-N.
BITS
1. Building Integrated Timing Source
2. See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).
Bits per Second (b/s)

The rate at which data is sent over some communication line. For example, data rate of a modem
is usually measured in kilobits per second.
BITSSYNC
Output synchronization
BKRST
Backup and Restore
BLT
Both-way Line Termination
BNC
1. A coaxial connector type commonly known by abbreviation of manufacturer
Bayonet-Neill-Concelman
2. See also Bayonet Neill Concelman (BNC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
BOC
Bell Operating Company
Boot, BOOT
Processor running boot code. To load and initialize the operating system on a computer. See also
Bootdisk.
Bootdisk
In reference to Operating System (OS): The magnetic disk (usually a hard disk) from which an
OS kernel is loaded (or “bootstrapped”). This second phase in system start-up is performed by a
simple bootstrap loader program held in Read-only Memory (ROM), possibly configured by data
stored in some form of writable non-volatile storage.
BPM
Binary Performance Monitoring
BPV
See Bipolar Violation (BPV).
BRDG
Multipoint Data Bridge
BRI
See Basic Rate Interface (BRI).
BSC
Basic Switch Chip
Buffer
A temporary storage device that compensates for the difference between data transmission speeds
when transferring data from one device to another
Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS)

In North America, the clocks that provide and distribute timing to a wire line network lower
levels; known in the rest of the world as Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
C C-source
A method of protecting against power supply failure by applying the output of redundant units to
a common bus via diode-coupling.
CAL
Current Alarm List
CAMR
Centralized Autonomous Message Reporting
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Card
A module might contain one, two, three, or more cards. The MATX101 Matrix Module (1680
OGM) is an example of a circuit pack that contains five cards. In the past, there was nearly always
one card in each module; therefore, “card” might be used when “module” was actually meant.
Components (for example, integrated circuits, resistors, capacitors, etc.) mount on the card or
Printed Wiring Board (PWB). Conductors in the PWB carry electrical current from one
component to another.
Card Presence Indication (CPI)

A distributed diode matrix structure used to allow the control system to detect the presence of
installed circuit packs in the shelf.
Card Presence Indicator (CPI)

Indicates presence or absence of a module; provides an interrupt to the shelf processor through the
Serial Communications Interface (SCI) for modules that have a microcontroller; enables shelf
processors to detect removal and/or insertion of any module (or circuit pack) in the shelf. See also
Serial Communications Interface (SCI).
CAS
Channel-Associated Signal
CASMIM
Connection and Service Management Information Model
CB
Circuit Breaker (also CKB)
CBIT
Parity monitoring. Select CBIT monitoring when operating with equipment that generates CBIT
parity to monitor signal performance.
CC
1. Communication Controller
2. See also Country Code (CC).
CCAL
Command Community Authorization Level
CCFC
Command Community Functional Category
CCL
1. See Computer Control Language (CCL).
2. Configuration Control Letter
3. See Coral Common LISP (CCL).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CCLK
Composite Clock
CCM
Cross-connect Map
CCN
Cross-connect Network
CD
See Chromatic Dispersion (CD).
CDA
Central Clock Distribution (circuit pack). A circuit pack that distributes 24 modulated 155.52
MHz reference clocks to Clock Distribution B circuit packs.
CDAC
Custom-Defined Alarms and Controls
CDB
Clock Distribution (module). A module that regenerates and distributes 24 modulated 155.52
MHz clocks to their associated user circuit packs.
CDE
Common Desktop Environment
CDM
See Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA).
CDU
Clock Distribution Unit (module)
Central Office (CO)

Typically called C-O; a telephone company facility where subscriber lines are joined to switching
equipment for connecting other local and long-distance subscribers to each other; sometimes it
means wire center in which there are several switching exchanges. The overseas term for CO is
“public exchange”.
CEV
See Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV).
CFA
Carrier Failure Alarm
CFC
1. Clock and Frame Converter
2. Clock Frame Circuit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CGA
Carrier Group Alarm
Checksum
The sum of a group of data items used for error checking. Checksum is computed by the sending
computer based upon an algorithm that counts the bits going out in a packet. The check digit is
then sent to the other end as the packet tail (or trailer). As the packet is being received, the
receiving computer goes through the same algorithm. If the receiving computer goes through the
same algorithm, and if the check digit it comes up with is the same as the one received, all is well.
Otherwise, it requests the packet be sent again.
CHIME
Circuit Installation and Maintenance Package
Chromatic Dispersion (CD)

The generally known form of dispersion found in single-mode fiber; determined by the CD
characteristics of the fiber; temporal in nature, related only to the optical signal wavelength. An
optical receiver is capable of accepting a certain amount of dispersion broadening, essentially
where individual pulses cannot be distinguished. Because dispersion is the broadening of a
transmit pulse of finite width, the narrower the transmit pulse, the more the dispersion that can be
tolerated in a system. A transmitter with a narrower spectral width allows the system to tolerate
more dispersion. Effects of CD are measured in PICO-seconds (ps). The CD coefficient that
describes fiber is given in terms of ps/nm-km. CD tolerance of a system is determined by the
transmitter being used and is given in ps/nm. Like attenuation, the CD characteristics of fiber are
wavelength dependent.
CID
1. Calling address Identification
2. Communications Interface Device
3. Connect Identification Device
4. Connection Identifier
5. Craft Interface Device
CIF
DS3/STS1 Customer Interface
CIM
Communications Interface Module
CIMAP
Circuit Installation and Maintenance Package
CIOP Circuit Pack

Coaxial Input/Output panel for EC1/DS3 terminations; representation of the equipment that can
be inserted or assigned to a slot within a shelf; also known as CIOP module.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Circuit Pack
Representation of equipment that can be inserted or assigned to a slot within a shelf; the
SYNC601 Master Sync is an example of a circuit pack that contains one card, otherwise known as
a Printed Wiring Board (PWB). “Module” is the name used for decades by Alcatel, Rockwell
International, and probably Collins Radio. “Circuit pack” came into use as the result of a
customer requirement.
CIT
Craft Interface Terminal (also known as user interface terminal)
CIU
Communication Interface Unit (sometimes referred to as Customer Interface Unit).
CKB
Circuit Breaker (also called CB)
Cladding
1. The transparent material, usually glass, that surrounds the optical fiber core. Cladding glass
has a lower refractive index than core glass. As the light signal travels down the central core
transmission path, it naturally spreads out (modal dispersion). The cladding causes the light to
be reflected back into the central core, thereby serving to maintain the signal strength over a
long distance.
2. When referring to a metallic cable, a process of covering with a metal (usually achieved by
pressure rolling, extruding, drawing, or swaging) until a bond is achieved.
CLEI code
Common Language Equipment Identification code (assigned by Bell Communications Research
Inc. [Bellcore]).
CLFI
Common Language Facility Identifier
CLK
Clock
CLLI
Common Language Location Identifier. Indicates the location of circuit packs at a network
element.
CLNP
Connectionless-node Network Layer Protocol. OSI network layer protocol that does not require a
circuit to be established before data is transmitted.
CLNS
Connectionless Network Service
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CLO
Command Lockout
Clock (CLK)
When used alone, refers to a primary synchronizing signal. It may appear with a subscript to refer
to the synchronizing signal on a particular signal path.
Close Button
A 1301 Network Manager action button that closes the screen without sending any commands to
the network element.
CMD
Circuit Breaker (also called CKB)
CMI
Coded Mark Inversion
CMIP
See Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP).
CMIS
See Common Management Information Services (CMIS).
CMISE
See Common Management Information Service Element (CMISE).
CMOS
Complementary Metal-Oxide Semiconductor. High-speed, low-power solid state component.
CMU
Master Clock (module)
CNM
Customer Network Management
CO
See Central Office (CO).
COA
Craft Orderwire and Alarms
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

A form of multiplexing where the transmitter encodes the signal using a pseudo-random sequence
that the receiver also knows and can use to decode the received signal. Each different random
sequence corresponds to a different communication channel. (CDMA is also referred to as “spread
spectrum”.) Motorola uses CDMA for digital cellular phones.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Code Violation
Violation of a coding rule; for example, the Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI) code is corrupted by
a Bipolar Violation (BPV).
Coding Violation (CV)

1. A violation in the coding of a signal over a digital circuit; the count of BIT-8 errors. See also
Code Violation.
2. Checksum Value. See also Checksum.
3. Combined Voice. Old Bell-Speak for single-line phone.
COM
Communications port (usually COM1 or COM2, referring to communications port #1 or port #2
on a personal computer [PC]).
Command Language
A set of procedural operators with a related syntax to indicate the functions to be performed by an
operating system.
Commands
Short-term maintenance controls such as loopback and manual switch.
Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP)

The Network Management (NM) standard for Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) networks.
NM information services are used by peer processes to exchange information and commands for
the purpose of NM. CMIS defines a message set and the structure and content of the messages
such that they might be used by “open” systems; can exchange information between an
application and a management station; is similar to Simple Network Management Protocol
(SNMP), but more powerful.
Common Management Information Service Element (CMISE)

CMISE functionality is provided by Common Management Information Protocol (CMIP) in
transporting network management information. Bellcore-specified protocol for communication
between network elements. A wireless telecommunications term.
Common Management Information Services (CMIS)

Network management information services are used by peer processes to exchange information
and commands for network management. CMIS defines a message set and the structure and
content of the messages such that they might be used by “open” systems. In concept, it is similar
to Simple Network Management Protocol (SNMP), but more powerful and more complex.
Communication Processor Card (CPC)

Provides interfaces to Operations Support System (OSS) and Transaction Language (TL) and to
Data Communications Channel (DCC), Local Communications Network (LCN), and X.25
networks; operates Communication Interface Unit (CIU) shelf.
Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD)

A programmable circuit similar to Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA), but generally on a
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
smaller scale; invented by Xilinx Inc. See also Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA).
Computer Control Language (CCL)

English-like query language based on COLINGO, for IBM 1401 and IBM 1410.
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-Nc)

An STS-N Line layer signal in which the STS envelope capacities from the N STS1s have been
combined to carry an STS-Nc synchronous payload envelope (SPE), which must be transported as
a single entity, not as several separate signals.
Concatenated Virtual Tributary (VTx-Nc)

A set of Virtual Tributaries (VTs) in which the VT envelope capacities from N VTxs have been
combined to carry a VTx-Nc, which must be transported as a single entity, not as several separate
signals.
Concatenation
A Synchronous Optical Network/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET/SDH) mechanism for
allocating contiguous bandwidth for transport of a payload greater than Synchronous Transport
Signal Level 1 (STS-1) (the electrical equivalent Optical Carrier Level 1 [OC-1], 51.84 Mb/s; T-3
plus Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) overhead). By using concatenation pointers,
multiple OC-1s can be linked end-to-end to provide contiguous bandwidth. The same approach is
used in higher SONET OC levels. Concatenation applications include bandwidth-intensive video
and high-speed data. See also Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) and Synchronous Digital
Hierarchy (SDH).
Condition Type
Reported fault or event type
Configured size
System configuration size as defined in database
Configuring
The act of defining the features to be contained on a module, shelf, or system.
CONP
Connection-oriented Network Protocol. OSI protocol that provides connection-oriented operation
to upper-layer protocols.
CONS
Connection-oriented Network Service
Control Menu
Located in the upper-left corner of each windows screen; contains commands that change the size
and position, and close the application window. Double-clicking the mouse can close the
application window. Control menu commands are also accessible through the keyboard.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Control Points
Relay contact closures provided by the system so that it may cause electrical control circuits
exterior to itself to be activated under software control.
Controlled Environmental Vault (CEV)

An underground room that houses electronic and/or optical equipment under controlled
temperature and humidity.
Coral Common LISP (CCL)

A dialect of LISt Processing (LISP) language defined by a consortium of companies brought
together in 1981 by the Defence Advanced Research Projects Agency (DARPA). Common Lisp is
a large, complex language; it features lexical binding, data structures using destruct and shift,
closures, multiple values, types using declare and a variety of numerical types.
CORBA
Common Object Request Broker Architecture
Correlation Tag (CTAG)

All commands issued to the network element using TL1 are given a correlation tag; response to
the command has the same correlation tag.
COSE
Common Open System Environment
Country Code (CC)

Identifies the country of the called party at an international telephone number; CC can be one,
two, or three digits. An international phone number consists of the CC and the Nationally
Significant Number (NSN) of up to 11 digits (for a total v12 digits) until December 31, 1996,
after which the CC stays at up to three digits and the NSN goes to up to 14 digits (for a total v15
digits).
CPC
See Communication Processor Card (CPC).
CPD
Circuit Provisioning Data
CPE
1. C-bit Parity Error
2. Customer Premise Equipment
CPI
CPI
See Card Presence Indicator (CPI).
CPLD
See Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CPORT, C port
Control Port that interfaces printers, terminals, and X.25 communications links
CPR number
Continuing Property Record number
CPU
Central Processing Unit (module)
CR
1. Critical. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.
2. Change Request
Craft Orderwire Alarms (COA)

A communication part on a network element.
CRC
See Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC).
CRI
Critical alarm. See also Alarm/Condition Codes.
Cross-connect
Connection point for DSX transmit/receive signals with defined characteristics.
CRS
Cross-connect
CRT
1. Cathode Ray Tube
2. Customer Response Team
CS
Center Stage.
CSDB
Command Security DataBase
CSES
Consecutive Severely Errored Second
CSU
1. Channel Service Unit
2. Customer Service Unit
CSX
Compact SONET Cross-connect System
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
CT
Craft Terminal
CTAG
See Correlation Tag (CTAG).
CV
See Coding Violation (CV).
CVL
Coding Violation count, Line. See Coding Violation (CV).
CVP
Coding Violation count, Path. See Coding Violation (CV).
CVS
Coding Violation count, Section; detected by section parity monitoring. See also Parity Check and
Coding Violation (CV).
Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC)

A number derived from a block of data and stored or transmitted with the data to detect any errors
in transmission; similar to a checksum, but more complicated. A CRC is often calculated by
adding words or bytes of the data. The receiving card recalculates the CRC from the data received
and compares it to the value originally transmitted; if the values are different, it indicates a
transmission error. The CRC is called redundant because it adds no significant information to the
transmission itself.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
D D&E
A particular type of communications terminal device per RS-232 standards.
DAC
Digital-to-Analog Converter
DAT
Digital Audio Tape
Data Communications Channel (DCC)

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) overhead reserved for communication between network
elements. The channel transports signals from one data processing device location to another data
processing device location.
Data Communications Equipment (DCE)

The devices and connections of a communications network that connect the communication
circuit between data source and destination (the Data Terminal Equipment [DTE]). A modem is
the most common DCE. Before data can be transmitted over a modem, the Data Terminal Ready
(DTR) signal must be active. DTR tells the DCE that the DTE is ready to transmit and receive.
DCE and DTE are usually connected by an RS-232 serial line. It is necessary to distinguish these
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
two devices because their connectors must be wired differently if a “straight-through” cable (pin 1
to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2, etc.) is used. DCE should have a female connector and should transmit on
pin two and receive on pin three. Many modems are “DTE” according to the original standard.
Data Link (DL)

A Data Link Control Identifier (DLCI) is a channel number is attached to data frames to tell the
network how to route the data.
Data Terminal Equipment (DTE)

A device acting as the source and/or destination of data and controlling the communication
channel; includes terminals, computers, protocol converters, and multiplexers; usually connected
by means of an RS-232 serial line to Data Communication Equipment (DCE), typically a modem.
It is necessary to distinguish these two device types because their connectors must be wired
differently if a “straight-through” cable (pin 1 to pin 1, pin 2 to pin 2 etc.) is used.
Database Change (DBCHG)

When the network element database is changed as a result of a user command, an autonomous
DBCHG report is generated to notify users of the change. These messages are used to keep all
users synchronized to the actual database contents.
Datapath Module
A matrix module, sync module, or Digital Signal Module (DSM). These modules/cards cannot
communicate with an IFS101 Interface Server installed in the multiflex shelf and strapped as
master (MIFS) module because they are not on the Internal Local Area Network (ILAN) bus.
Dataphone Digital Service (DDS)

The first private-line digital service offered by AT&T, with data rates typically at 2.4, 4.8, 9.6, and
56 kilobits per second. DDS is now part of AT&T Accunet family of services. Most Local
Exchange Carriers (LECs) and IntereXchange Carriers (IXC) offer similar services.
DB
Database
DBCHG
See Database Change (DBCHG).
DCC
See Data Communications Channel (DCC).
DCE
1. See Data Communication Equipment (DCE).
2. Data Circuit-terminating Equipment
DCF
Dispersion Compensation Fiber
DCN
Data Communications Network
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DCP
Data Collection Processor
DCS
Digital Cross-connect System
DDFS
Digital Direct Frequency Synthesizer
DDS
1. See Digital Data Service (DDS). The class of service offered by telecommunications
companies for transmitting digital data as opposed to voice.
2. Digital Data System
3. See Dataphone Digital Service (DDS).
DEACT
Deactivate
Demux
Demultiplex (-er, -ing)
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM)

A high-speed version of Wave Division Multiplex (WDM); increases capacity of Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET) fiber-optic transmission systems through the multiplexing of multiple
wavelengths of light; uses optical channel spacing on the order of 1.6 nm (200 GHz) and is
compatible with the International Telecommunications Union (ITU) channel plan. Wavelength
tolerance for these channels is ±0.3 nm. This permits as many as 16 channels in the optical band
from 1530 nm to 1560 nm. A SONET term. See also Narrow-Band Wavelength Division
Multiplex (NB-WDM).
DFB-SLM
Distributed Feedback - Single Longitudinal Mode (laser diode)
DG
Drop Group
DGN
Diagnostics
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DID
Directory Identifier
DIF
Desktop Integration Framework
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DIG
Digroup
Digital Data Service (DDS)

The class of service offered by telecommunications companies for transmitting digital data as
opposed to voice.
Direct Entry
Function that enables users to interact with a network element in TL1 form.
Dispersion
Dispersion is the process whereby optical pulses are widened as they travel along an optical fiber.
It is caused by the different wavelength components of a light signal of finite spectral width
traveling down the fiber at different velocities. The effect is a pulse at the terminating end of a
fiber that is wider than the original pulse that was transmitted. If the amount of widening is
excessive the individual pulses will not be distinguishable by the receiver. See also Chromatic
Dispersion and Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD).
Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB)

A multiplexing/switching technique similar to Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) that uses
IEEE 802.6 PLCP.
Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB)

The Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) access technique defined by IEEE 802.6 standard for
Switched Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS); based on Queued Packet Synchronous Exchange
(QPSX); operates by maintaining a queue at each station to determine when the station may
access its dual buses, which provide bidirectional access to its dual buses. Dual buses provide
bidirectional transmission between originating and terminating stations with excellent, end-to-end
congestion control ensured. DQDB consists of two unidirectional buses connected as an open ring
(for example, each bus is not directly interconnected). It provides for full-duplex operation
between any two nodes. See also Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM).
DL
See Data Link (DL).
DLMAP
Data Link Map
DLT
Download Tool
DMA
Direct Memory Access
DMAC
1. Direct Memory Access Control
2. Direct Memory Access Controller
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DMACS
Distributed Monitoring And Control System (an AT&T system definition standard).
DMI
Drop Module Interface
DNM
Distributed Network Management
DNS
Domain Naming System. Used in the Internet for translating names of network nodes into
addresses.
Domain
According to Management Information System (MIS) use, domain is the part of a computer
network in which data processing resources are under common control. In Microsoft™
networking, a domain is a collection of computers sharing a common domain database and
security policy that is stored on a Windows NT™ server domain controller. Each domain has a
unique name.
DOW
Digital Orderwire
DP
Datapath
DPLL
Digital Phase-Locked Loop
DPRAM
Dual-Port Random Access Memory
DQDB
1. Digital Queue Dual Bus
2. See Distributed Queue Data Bus (DQDB).
3. See Distributed Queue Dual Bus (DQDB).
DRAM
Dynamic Random Access Memory
Drop
Individual connections (sometimes called nodes) on a multipoint (also called multidrop) circuit.
Drop Side Signal

A traffic path connecting to the tributary side of the network element; path can be electrical (such
as DS3 or STS1) or optical (such as OC3 or OC12) and can include Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET) overhead information/access. Specific capabilities and format are product and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
feature dependent.
DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the DS0 channels. DS0 PTEs interpret and either
modify or create the DS0 signaling information necessary to transport the DS0 channels.
DS0 PTE
Digital Signal, level 0 Path-Terminating Equipment
DS0, DS-0
Digital Signal, level 0; pronounced “D-S zero”; a DS0 is 64,000 bits per second (b/s) (64
kilobits), equal to one voice conversation digitized under Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
Twenty-four DS0s (24 64 kb/s) equal one DS1, which is T-1 or 1.544 million b/s.
DS1
Digital Signal level 1 (1.544 Mb/s). Can contain 24 DS0s.
DS1CP
Connectorized input/output panel for DS1 terminations.
DS1WW
Wire-wrap input/output panel for DS1 terminations.
DS2
Digital Signal level 2 (6.312 Mb/s). Can contain 96 DS0s.
DS3
Digital Signal, level 3. Bell System-compatible 44.736 Mb/s digital signal format. See AT&T
Compatibility Bulletin 119 (CB-119) (formerly Technical Advisory 34); (T3 equivalent). Can
contain 28 DS1s. See ANSI T1LB-117 for details.
DS4NA
Digital Signal Level 4 North America
DSB
DCC Server Board
DSF
Dispersion-shifted Fiber
DSI
DS1 Interface (module)
DSK
1. Disk unit
2. Hard Disk Drive (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
DSM
1. Digital Signal Module. Modules that support optical facilities include OC192, OC48, OC12,
OC3, and DS3.
2. Distributed System Management
DSP
1. Digital Signal Parameter
2. Digital Signal Processing
3. Domain-specific Port
DSX
Digital Signal Cross-connect
DSx
Digital Signal of an unspecified rate
DSX-1
Digital Signal, level 1 cross-connect
DSX-3
Bell System-compatible Digital Signal cross-connect point for equipment that generates or uses
DS3 signals. This point has defined wave shapes and voltage levels, in accordance with American
National Standard T1.102-1987 (formerly AT&T Compatibility Bulletin 119).
DTAU
Digital Test Access Unit
DTE
See Data Terminal Equipment (DTE).
DTMF
Dual-Tone Multifrequency
Duplex (DX)
Simultaneous communication in both directions between two locations.
DUS
Do not Use for Synchronization
DWDM
See Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM).
DX
Duplex configuration. See Duplex (DX).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Dx, DEMUX
Demultiplex direction, the tributary output signal, arriving on the optical carrier and leaving
through the tributary (electrical) outbound data stream.
DXC
Digital Cross-connect Control
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
E E2A
An AT&T alarm and control interface specification.
EC
Electrical Container
EC1
1. Electrical Carrier, level 1
2. Electrical Connection Level 1, STS-1 line and section object entity (electrical STSX-1)
ECL
Emitter-Coupled Logic
EDFA
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier
EDFFA
Erbium-Doped Fluoride Fiber Amplifier
EDSX
Electronic Digital Signal Cross-connect
EEPROM
Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory
EF
Environmental Factor
EFD
Event Forwarding Discriminator
EIA
Electronic Industries Association
Element
Port number
ELF
Event Log File
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ELM
Event and Log Manager
EM
Element Management
EMA
Element Management Application
Embedded Facility
A lower level (for example, DS1) digital signal transported in a higher level signal. Examples are
a DS1 signal embedded in a DS3, or a DS3 embedded in an STS-1 facility.
EMI
Electromagnetic Interference
EML
1. Element Management Layer
2. Equipment Management Layer
EMS
Element Management System
End System (ES)

A system where an Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) connection is terminated or initiated. An
originating ES initiates the ATM connection; terminating ES terminates the ATM connection.
Operations, Administration, and Maintenance (OAM) cells can be generated.
End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS)

The Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) protocol used for router detection and address
resolution.
ENE
End Network Element
Entity
Refers to anything within XXX that has a service state associated with it; this includes equipment
and facilities.
EOB
Electrical-Optical Converter (module)
EOC
1. Electrical-Optical Converter (shelf)
2. Embedded Operations Channel; implies Section Overhead.
3. Extended Operating temperature Condition
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EOCL
Embedded Operation Channel failure, Line
EP3
DS3 Interface (module)
EPROM
Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory
EQPT
See Equipment (EQPT)
Equipment (EQPT)
Electronic or mechanical devices at network nodes where end users are connected to
communications network
Equipped size
Total amount of hardware equipped within some maximum port capacity. Equipped size must be
less than or equal to configured (or wired) size.
Equipping
The act of installing a plug-in module into a shelf and declaring use of that module to the system.
See also In Service (IS) and Out of Service (OOS).
Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA)

The dominant method for signal amplification in long-haul light wave transmission systems.
EDFAs differ from the normal method regenerative or electro-optic repeaters in that light does not
have to be converted to an electrical signal, amplified, then converted back to light. EDFAs are
not frequency dependent, so they allow bandwidth upgrades (within) limits without replacing the
entire transmission systems. Undersea transmission systems use EDFA technology.
Errored Second (ES)

A second during which a Coding Violation (CV) occurs.
ES
1. End Stage
2. See Errored Second (ES).
3. See End System (ES).
ES-IS
See End System to Intermediate System (ES-IS).
ES1
STS-1 Interface (module)
ESA
DS1 Adapter (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ESCP
Errored Seconds-CP-bit Path
ESD
Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is
prone to damage from static electricity. See also ESS.
ESF
See Extended Superframe (ESF).
ESF
1. Extended Superframe Format. DS1 signal framing format consisting of 24 frames. Each
frame contains a payload of 24 channels plus 1 overhead bit.
2. See also Extended Superframe (ESF).
ESF-FDL
Extended Superframe Format-Facility Data Link. A 4 kb/s data link embedded in the DS1
overhead bits.
ESL
Errored Second, Line. See Errored Second (ES)
ESP
Errored Second, Path. See Errored Second (ES)
ESS
1. Electrostatic-Sensitive Device. A circuit component, such as CMOS integrated circuit, that is
prone to damage from static electricity. Also ESS.
2. Errored Second, Section. See Errored Second (ES)
ESW
Excessive Switching
EXBER
Excessive Bit Error Rate. See Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER) and Superframe (SF).
EXNFF
Excessive Number of Failed Facilities
Expansion. Increase of system switching capacity by addition of hardware and/or software
Expansion
Increase of system switching capacity by addition of hardware and/or software.
Extended Superframe (ESF)

One of two possible framing patterns for a DS1 signal. ESF has an extra channel that can pass
synchronization messages; the Superframe (SF) cannot.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
EXZ
Excessive Zeros; a performance primitive for DS1 facilities.
Eye Diagram
A graphic presentation formed by the superimposition of the waveforms of all possible pulse
sequences.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
F F3
Fractional T3
Facility
1. The uni-direction external data interfaces with Alcatel equipment; possible facilities include
OC-M, STS-N, STS-Nc, and DSn; each has an associated direction to distinguish between
transmit and receive.
2. Lines and paths between network elements and connecting network element to DS3 network
FACTERM
Facility/Circuit TERMination equipment failure
FAD
1. Facility Access Digroup. Test access port component. One FAD is associated with equipment
side of connection and the other FAD is associated with facility side of connection.
2. Functional Access Domain
FBE
Frame Bit Error. An error on an incoming DS3 signal detected and reported by the performance
monitor.
FC
Failure Count
FC/PC
A specific type of fiber-optic cable connector.
FCC
Federal Communications Commission
FCP
Failed Count-Path
FDDI
Fiber Distributed Data Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FDL
1. Facility Data Link
2. See Frame Data Link (FDL).
FDL
Facility Data Link. An overhead channel in DS1 ESF framing format providing reliability
information
FDLPM
Facility Data Link Performance Monitoring
FDM
See Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM).
FDN
Fully Distinguished Name
FE
Far-End
FEAC
Far-End Alarm and Control. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for status and control
communications.
FEBE
Far-End Block Error. Channel bit used in C-bit formatting for performance monitoring event.
FEND
Far End
FERF
Far-End Receive Failure
FES
Frame Errored Seconds
FFP
Fast Facility Protection
FFT1
Fast Facility Protection Threshold 1
FFT2
FFT3
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FG, FGND
Frame Ground
FI
Fault Isolation
Fiber Optic Cable

The core of the fiber optic cable is made of very pure glass; it is surrounded by four protective
layers, given here from the core out: cladding, buffer, dielectric strength member, and the
polyvinyl chloride (PVC) subunit jacket.
FIC
Frame Identification Code. Identifies the DS1 within a building.
Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA)

Used on some cards to modify hardware operation through software, rather than physically
changing the hardware on the card; logic network can be programmed into the device after its
manufacture. An FPGA consists of an array of logic elements. Most FPGAs are reprogrammable
because their logic functions and interconnect are defined by Random Access Memory (RAM)
cells; others can be programmed only once, retaining programming permanently. FPGAs have
enabled development of logic emulators. See also Complex Programmable Logic Device (CPLD).
FIFO
First In, First Out
FIT
Failures In Time: 1 billion hours (Failures per billion hours).
Fixed Stuff (R-Bits/Bytes)

Fixed stuff (R) bits and bytes compensate for the differences between the bandwidth available in
the STS1 and Virtual Tributary (VT) synchronous payload envelopes and the bandwidth required
for the actual payload mappings (for example, DS1, DS1C, DS2, DS3, etc.). They facilitate
interworking with existing transmission systems or allow interworking between fixed and floating
VTs. R-bits and bytes have no defined value. The receiver ignores the value of these bits/bytes
(except for BIP-8 calculation/verification).
FLEXCOM
A trademark of Bellcore.
FLT
Fault
FM
Fault Manager
FMBIT
Parity monitoring. Monitors total path performance and provides a true indication of errors from
point of inception to point of monitoring.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Format
Refers to basic structure and arrangement or order of elements in a command or data.
FP
Fabry-Perot (laser diode)
FP-MLM
Fabry-Perot-Multilongitudinal Mode (laser)
FPE
Frame Parity Error
FPGA
1. Fused Programmable Gate Array
2. See also Field-programmable Gate Array (FPGA).
FPI
Fast Protection Interrupt
FPT
Full Pass-Through
Frame
A sequence of bits preceded by or followed by a valid framing bit
Frame Data Link (FDL)

A message channel in the overhead of a DS1 Extended Superframe (ESF) signal that can relay
clock-quality information.
Frame ground
The ground reference provided by the metal rack structure; also referred to as rack ground. Tied
to CO ground bus at top of each rack.
FRCD
Forced
Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)

The simultaneous transmission of multiple separate signals through a shared medium (such as a
wire, optical fiber or light beam) by modulating, at the transmitter, the separate signals into
separable frequency bands, and adding those results linearly either before transmission or within
the medium. While combined, all signals can be amplified, conducted, translated in frequency,
and routed toward a destination as a single signal, resulting in economies (the motivation for
multiplexing). Apparatus at the receiver separates the multiplexed signals by frequency passing or
rejecting filters and individually demodulating the results appropriately for the modulation
scheme used for that band or group. Bands are joined to form groups, and groups can then be
joined into larger groups, a technique is common only in large and sophisticated systems and is
not a necessary part of FDM. Transmitters and receivers need not be close to each other.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FSBE
Frame Synchronization Bit Error
FSS
First Stage Switch
FTP
File Transfer Protocol. An IP-based file transfer protocol.
FTS
Fiber Transmission System
Full Duplex
1. Independent, simultaneous communication in both directions between two locations.
2. Standard 2-way connection.
Full-Duplex Transmission
1. Simultaneous two-way independent transmission in both directions. Compare with
Half-Duplex Transmission.
2. Describes terminals in the echoplex modem.
FWHM
Full Width, Half Maximum. A measure of the spectral width of the optical signal.
FWK
Framework (ALMAP)
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
G GAP
Generic Alarm Proxy
Gateway Communications Functions

Functions to facilitate operations communications between two communicating entities across
dissimilar subnetworks. Examples include concentration, message routing and relaying (Network
Layer), and application layer protocol conversion and/or message translation. See also Mediation
Functions.
GC
Generic Component
GDL
Green Data Link
GDMO
Generic Description of Managed Objects
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
GEM
Generic Element Manager
Generic upgrade
Software update from one release to the next. Releases must not be skipped when performing a
generic upgrade.
GLO
Green Lockout
GM
General Market
GND (or Gnd)

Ground
GNE
Gateway Network Element
GOS
Grade of Service
Graphical User Interface (GUI)

This interface supports applications that consist of a series of rectangular presentation regions
called windows. Each window displays another application.
Grooming
The process of moving traffic from one point to another.
Growth
Increasing system port capacity
GTI
Generic Transport Interface
GTIO
Optical Generic Transport Interface
GTP
General Telemetry Processor
GTS
Generic Test System
GUI
See Graphical User Interface (GUI).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
H HAL
Hixtorical Alarm List
Half duplex
Standard 1-way connection
Half-Duplex Transmission
A circuit designed for data transmission in both directions, but not at the same time. Telex is an
example of a half-duplex system, as is speaking on with most speaker-phones. Compare with
Full-Duplex Transmission.
HALog
Historical Alarm Log
HD Repeater
High Density Repeater
HDB
Hard Disk Backup
HDLC
High-level Data Link Control. Used on the bus that connects the Shelf Processor Card (SPC) with
its Datapath (DP) cards on the same shelf.
HDLC-NRC
High-level Data Link Control-Normal Response Control
HDLC-NRM
High-level Data Link Control-Normal Response Mode
Head End
The point where the line overhead is inserted. (Tail end describes the point where the line
overhead is terminated.) A central control device required within some Local Area Network/Area
Network (LAN/MAN) systems to provide such centralized functions as remodulation, retiming,
message accountability, contention control, diagnostic control, and access.
HIF
High-speed InterFace
HLD
High-level Design
HLDOVER
See Holdover.
HMI
Human Machine Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
HMU
23 Muldem (module)
HOD
Hour of Day
Holdover
A mode in which an oscillator that was previously tracking a reference attempts to maintain the
last-known frequency instead of continuing to track. Transition to Holdover could occur for a
variety of reasons, including failure on a reference or a manual switch.
HPSC
High-Performance System Controller
HRC
Hekimian React Compatibility
HS
High Speed
HSS
High-speed Shelf
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
I I-LAN
Intra-System 10BASE-T Local Area Network
I/O
See Input/Output (I/O).
IBFEC
In-Band Forward Error Correction
ICL
Interface Control Link. An RS-485 signal level bus for communication between master and slave
configurations from a satellite processor multitapped transmission media; link speed is 6.25 MHz;
consists of receive data, transmit data, clock, bus enable and copy active.
ICL(d)
Interface Control Link (differential). An RS-485 signal level bus for alarm register read/write
from the RSP and PDU: multitapped transmission media; link speed is 6.25 MHz;1 consists of
receive data, transmit data, clock, and bus enable.
ICM
Intelligent Communications Module (circuit pack)
ICS
Item Change Status
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ID
Identification
ID/NSAP
Identification/Network Service Access Point
IDL
Interface Definition Language
IDMA
Independent Direct Memory Access
IEC
1. Incoming Error Count
2. International Electrotechnical Commission
IFS
InterFace Server module
IGFET
Insulated Gate Field Effect Transistor
IIC
Inter-Integrated Circuit
IID
Image ID
ILAN
Internal Local Area Network (internal to the Network Element [NE]); the bus used between the
Interface Server Module (IFS) and shelf processor cards in NE.
IM
Information Model
IMAGE
Alternate Map Storage
IMP
Integrated Multi-protocol
In Service (IS)
An equipment module is available for use by the system. (It may be online or offline.) An
equipped module is either IS or Out of Service (OOS).
In-Service Growth
A feature that enables service providers to install one optical channel initially, then upgrade to
additional optical channels or a mix of data rates. Additional modules may be added one at a time
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
while the system is in service.
INCFAD
Incoming Failure because of Facility (or Fading)
INE
1. Intelligent Network Element
2. Intermediate Network Element
Information Processing Functions

Functions, centralized in a subnetwork, to perform common application processing and
management for Network Elements (NEs) within subnetwork. Example NE functions include
performance data storage and failure condition thresholding for alarm reporting. Example
management functions include migration of “OS-like” functions out to the network for
subnetwork trouble sectionalization, configuration (for example, cross-connection) management,
and Customer Network Management (CNM). See also Mediation Functions.
InGaAs
Indium Gallium Arsenide
InGaAsP
Indium Gallium Arsenide Phosphorus
Input/Output (I/O)
Two of the three computer functions; the third is processing. I/O describes the interrelated tasks of
providing information to the computer and providing the results of processing to the user. I/O
devices include keyboards (input) and printers (output). A disk drive is an input and an output
device because it provides information to the computer and receives information from the
computer.
INT
Internal
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN)

ISDN is a special telephone line that allows data to be transmitted using end-to-end digital
connectivity. (Data transmits digitally directly from sender to receiver.) Two basic types of ISDN:
BRI (144,000 bits per second [b/s] designed for the desktop) and PRI (1,544,000 b/s, designed for
telephone switches, computer telephony, and voice processing systems). Neither ISDN Basic Rate
Interface (BRI) nor ISDN Primary Rate Interface (PRI) is a standard service, though there are
several “standard” configurations. A difficult service to run, ISDN requires a special ISDN
modem (a terminal adapter [hardware] that allows the sending and receiving of digital signals
over ISDN lines. Typical modems convert digital signals from the computer into analog signals
that can be sent over copper cables. But an ISDN terminal adapter transmits only digital data.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Interleave
1. Transmission of pulses from two or more digital sources in time-division sequence over a
single path.
2. A data communication technique, used in conjunction with error-correcting codes, to reduce
the number of undetected error bursts. In the interleaving process code symbols are reordered
before transmission so that any two successive code symbols are separated by |-1 (| is called
the degree of interleaving). Upon reception, interleaved code symbols are reordered into their
original sequence, effectively spreading or randomizing errors (in time) to enable more
complete correction by a random error-correcting code.
3. Refers to the way a computer writes to and reads from a hard disk.
Intermediate Reach (IR)

Refers to optical sections from a few kilometers (km) to approximately 15 km; an AT&T
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) term.
Intermediate System (IS)

Refers to a system that originates and terminates traffic, and forwards traffic to other systems; an
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) term.
Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS)

An Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) link-state hierarchical routing protocol, based on
DECnet Phase V routing, whereby intermediate systems (routers) exchange routing information
based on a single metric to determine network topology.
Internet Protocol (IP)

Part of the Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) family of protocols
describing software that tracks the Internet address of nodes, routes outgoing messages, and
recognizes incoming messages; used in gateways to connect networks of Open Systems
Interconnection (OSI) network Level 3 and above. See also Internet Protocol (IP) Address and
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol (TCP/IP).
Internet Protocol (IP) Address

A unique, 32-bit number for a specific transmission control protocol/internet protocol (TCP/IP)
host on the Internet; normally printed in dotted decimal form (for example, 128.126.50.224).
When a domain is assigned a group of numbers by the Internet central registry, it can house one or
several domains and/or hosts. Some IP addresses are reserved for broadcasts in respective
domains. See also Domain.
IOB
I/O Optical Converter (module)
IOC
Input/Output Conditioner
IOO
OS-OS Interface
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IP
1. In Progress
2. See Internet Protocol (IP).
IPB
Internal Protect module. A space matrix that provides a cross-connect between the continuing path
of the failed DS3/STS-1 and the protection path from the DS3/STS-1 interface protection circuit
pack.
IPC
Interprocess Communications
IPE
In-Service Parameter Editing
IPU
Interface Processing Unit (module)
IR
See Intermediate Reach (IR).
IRB
Inter-Rack Bus
IRO
Interrack Optics
IS
1. See In Service (IS).
2. See Intermediate System (IS).
IS-ANR
In Service-Abnormal
IS-IS
See Intermediate System to Intermediate System (IS-IS).
IS-NR
In Service-Normal
ISDN
See Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN).
ISID
1. Idle Signal Identifier
2. Idle Signal Identification
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ISL
Interprocessor Sanity Link. Control interface between duplex processor modules of cross-connect
control system (that is, IPUs, APUs, or CPUs)
ISLTD
Isolated, fully
ISU
In-Service Upgrade
ITAG
Informational Message Tag
ITB
DS3/STS-1 Test Board (module)
ITS
Integrated Test System; a Bell OS
IW
Insertion Word
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
J JFET
Junction Field Effect Transistor
Jitter
Relative phase change between data time slots and clock (timing) pulses. Results in bit errors and,
in voice circuits, noise in telephone circuits. Jitter is cumulative and is primary limitation to
maximum system length, including terminals and repeaters, of a digital transmission system.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
K KAM
Keep Alive Message
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
L L1
Level 1
L2PE
Level 2 Processor Element
L3PE
Level 3 Processor Element
L3PE2
Level 3 Processor Element II
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LADM
Linear 1:1 Add-Drop Multiplexer. See Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM).
LAN
Local Area Network
LANCE
Local Area Network Controller for Ethernet
LAPB
Line Access Procedure, Balanced
LAPD
Link Access Procedure, D-channel
LBCL
Laser Bias Current, Line
LBO
See Line Buildout (LBO).
LCI
Logical Channel Identifier
LCN
1. Local Communications Network, a Local Area Network (LAN).
2. Logical Channel Number
LD
Line Driver
LDAP
Lightweight Directory Access Protocol
LDB
Loop Detection Buffer
LDCC
Line Data Communications Channel
LDR
Line Driver/Receiver (ECI or DS3)
LEC
Local Exchange Carrier
LED
Light-emitting Diode
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LEFF
Laser Efficiency
LEMA
Legacy Element Management Application
LEMSDXC
Legacy Element Management Application—Digital Cross-connect
LEMSSNT
Legacy Element Management Application—SONET
Level translator
Provides interfaces from the Administrative Processor to external devices or communication links.
See also LTx.
LF
Loop Filter
LFACS
Loop Facilities Assignment and Control System; a Bell OS
LG
Line Group
LIF
Low-speed Interface
Light Power Received Normalized (LPRN)

The optical power level as an integer percentage of the calibrated optical power level. The
calibrated optical power level is a “snapshot” of the received power level at a user-requested point
in time.
Limited mode
System operating mode that allows access to a limited number of commands. It is primarily used
for database restoration.
Line
A transmission medium, together with the associated Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE),
required to provide the means of transporting information between two consecutive
line-terminating network elements: One originates the line signal, and the other terminates the line
signal. In SONET, the line envelope is a subset of the section envelope.
Line Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) Code

A code generated by Section-Terminating Equipment (STE) upon loss of input signal, loss of
frame, or equipment failure. Line AIS signal maintains operation of downstream regenerators and
prevents generation of unnecessary alarms. At the same time, data and orderwire communication
is retained between the regenerators and downstream Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Line Buildout (LBO)
Equalization pad or artificial line network.
Line Group
Group of Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) signals at an Add/Drop Multiplexer (ADM)
connection.
Line Side Signal

A signal suitable for transmission over outside plant facilities or across an administrative
boundary.
Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE)

Network Elements (NEs) that originate and/or terminate line (OC-N) signals; LTE includes NEs
that originate and/or terminate line signals. LTEs originate, access, modify, and/or terminate the
transport overhead.
Linear Add-Drop Multiplexer (LADM)

Network element in a linear network that provides access to all N, or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level vN), of the STS line signals contained within an OC-N optical channel.
STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it passes
through Add-Drop Multiplexer (ADM).
LMC
Large Matrix Configuration
LMF
Loss of Multiframe
LMU
12 Muldem (module)
LOA
Loss of Activity
Location
The physical location (site) of a network device.
LOF
Loss of Frame
Long Band
The longer wavelength half of the Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) amplification window
that is approximately 1547 nm to 1560 nm.
Long Reach (LR)

Refers to optical sections of approximately 25 kilometers or more in length and is applicable to all
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) rates. Compare with Short Reach (SR).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Loopback
A maintenance condition that redirects normal input to output, or vice versa; consists of a
diagnostic test in which the transmitted signal is returned to the sending device after passing
through a data communications link or network, thereby allowing a technician (or built-in
diagnostic circuit) to compare the returned signal with the transmitted signal and determine what
is wrong. Loopbacks are often done by excluding one piece of equipment after another,
eliminating non-problematic equipment to isolate a problem.
LOP
Loss of Pointer
LOS
Loss of Signal
LOSS
Loss of Signal Second
LPF
Low-Pass Filter
LPRN
See Light Power Received Normalized (LPRN)
LPTA
Line/Path Terminating ASIC
LR
1. Line Receiver
2. See also Long Reach (LR).
LSS
Local Security Server
LT1
LT1 Level Translator (module)
LT2
LT3
LT4
LT5
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
LT8
LT8 Level Trasnaltor (module)
LTE
1. Line-Terminating Element
2. See also Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE).
3. Lite-terminating equipment (Synchronous Optical Network [SONET]). Asynchronous
Transfer Mode (ATM) equipment, terminating a communications facility using a SONET Lite
Transmission Convergence (TC) layer (usually reserved for end user or Local Area Network
[LAN] equipment); does not implement some of the maintenance functions used in long-haul
networks such as termination of path, line, and section overhead.
LTx
Level Translator. Generic term for one of several level translator modules used in the APS to
interface between user control ports and internal formats. Types include RS-232, RS-485, X.25,
and TABS physical interfaces.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
M M13
Multiplex/demultiplex DS1 to/from DS3
M16
Matrix 16?16. A time-space matrix circuit pack with 16 horizontal and 16 vertical inputs and
outputs.
M32
outputs.
M40
outputs.
MA
1. Maintenance Assembly. An alarm or PM point checked for changes in a TABS system.
2. Memory Administration (Out of Service)
MAC
1. Memory Arbitration Circuit
2. Media Access Control. A standard data link layer address that is required for every port of
device that connects to a LAN.
MAINT
Maintenance
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MAINT, MT
Maintenance
MAJ
Major
MAL
Maintenance Access Link
MAN
Manual operation
ManCont
Manual Control
MB
1. Management Information Base
2. MegaByte(s)
MCB
Master Clock (module). It provides a 155.52 MHz, modulated with 166.67 Hz frame signal,
reference clock.
MCR
Master Control Register
MD
Mediation Device
MDB
Multipoint Data Bridge
MDL
Maintenance Data Link. Three bits used as a 28.2 kb/s terminal-to-terminal link identifier. Part of
the overhead in the C-bit parity format.
Mediation Functions
Usually consist of gateway communications functions, but can include information processing
functions. When the two functions are combined, they are often contained in a stand-alone
mediation device (MD) or packaged as an added module to an Network Element (NE) or
equipment frame. Gateway communications functions often exist alone in a gateway NE or
intermediate NE.
Menu Bar
Contains a list of menus. After menus are opened, commands are selected that instruct the
application to perform an action.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MIB
Management Information Base
MIC
1. Module Interface Circuit
2. Module Interface Controller
MIN
Minor
MJ
Major
MJU
Multijunction Unit
MLM
Multilongitudinal Mode
MLP
Multilink Processor
MML
Man-Machine Language
MMU
Memory Management Unit
MN
Minor
Mnemonics
Displays as an underlined character in a menu item or any dialog box control text. A mnemonic
provides quick access to any menu item or dialog box field with a single keystroke.
MNP
Microcom Networking Protocol
MOC
Managed Object Class
Modem
Modulator/Demodulator
Modulator/Demodulator (Modem)
A communications device that enables the computer to transmit information over a telephone line.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Module
An electrical assembly (usually a printed circuit board and faceplate) mechanically designed as a
single detachable unit. (Also called circuit pack.)
Module
An independent assembly of electronic components with some distinct function. A module might
contain one, two, three, or more cards. In the past, there was nearly always one card in each
module; therefore, “card” might be used when “module” was actually meant. Even in the case of a
module that contains only one card, the module includes a front panel, ejector handles, etc. that
are mounted on the card. See also Card and Circuit Packs.
Monitor
1. Visual display device (usually a CRT) associated with a control terminal
2. To receive outputs directed to another control port or user
MOP
Method of Procedure
Most-Significant Bit
The left-most bit position, Bit 1. The most-significant bit is transmitted first.
MPS
MIB Procesing System
MPU
Microprocessor Unit
MQW
Multiple Quantum Well
MRA
Maintenance Resource Administration
MRC
Master Control Register
MSB
Most Significant Bit
MSI
Microprocessor Serial Interface
MT, MAINT
Maintenance
MTBF
Mean Time Between Failures
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
MTCE
Removed for maintenance
MTL
Memory Transfer Link. A 12.5 Mb/s serial data link to allow higher-level processor to lower-level
processor, satellite processor to OBPE/UBPE, communications
MTTR
Mean Time To Repair
MTX
Matrix module
Multiplex (MUX, Mx)

Multiplex direction, the tributary input signal arriving on tributary interface (electrical) and being
multiplexed up onto optical signal, then leaving system. Combining several signals for
transmission on some shared medium; signals are combined at the transmitter by a multiplexer
(MUX) and split up at the receiver by a demultiplexer (DEMUX). The communications channel
can be shared between the independent signals in one of several different ways: Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), and Code Division Multiplexing
(CDM). If the inputs take turns to use the output channel (TDM), the output bandwidth need be
no greater than the maximum bandwidth of any input. If many inputs are active simultaneously,
the output bandwidth must be at least as great as the total bandwidth of all simultaneously active
inputs. In this case the multiplexer is also known as a concentrator. See also Time Division
Multiplexing (TDM), Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM),and Code Division Multiple
Access (CDMA).
MUX
See Multiplex (MUX, Mx).
Mx
See Multiplex (Mx, MUX).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
N NA
1. Not Alarmed or No Alarm
2. Not Applicable
3. Not Available, in reference to performance monitoring parameter validity flags.
NAD
Network Access Domain
Narrow-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (NB-WDM)

A Wavelength Division Multiplex (WDM) that uses optical channel spacing on the order of 7 nm
or more; permits as many as four channels in the optical band from 1532 nm to 1558 nm. See also
Dense Wavelength Division Multiplex (DWDM).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NAS
North American Standard
NB-WDM
See Narrow-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (NB-WDM).
NC
Normally Closed
NCO
Numerically Controlled Oscillator
NDC
National Destination Code
NDSF
Nondispersion-Shifted Fiber
NE
1. Near End. See also NEND.
2. Network Element. Can be a switching NE or a transport NE. Cross-connects are transport
NEs.
3. See also Network Element (NE).
NE Configuration
The physical components within a Network Element (NE).
NE Type
The model number of a specific Network Element (NE).
NEBS
Network Equipment-Building System typical equipment requirements (Bell Communications
Research; technical reference TR-EOP-000063).
NEC
National Electric Code
NEND
Near End
NEP
Network Element Processor
NEREF
Network Element Reference
NES
Network Element Synthesis
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NET
Network Entity Title
Network
Database representation of resources allocated to a secondary user. Network may also refer to
physical elements of a communications system; equipment, transmission facilities, and end users.
Network Element (NE)

Configurable transmission controller used as a multiplexer, access node, or Add/Drop multiplexer.
Network entity
Any of the physical devices that make up the communications network
Network facility
Equipment used to connect individual NEs
Network resource
All physical devices, including end equipment, transmission facilities, and end users
Network Service Access Point (NSAP)

The point at which the Open Systems Interconnection (OSI) network service is made available to
a transport entity. NSAPs are identified by OSI network addresses. The NSAP is a generic
standard for a network address consisting of 20 octets. ATM has specified E.164 for public
network addressing and the NSAP address structure for private network addresses.
NIMAN
Not Isolated, requires Manual isolation.
NIPSS
Not fully isolated
NLAN
Network Local Area Network
NM
Network Management or Network Manager
NMA
1. Network Monitoring and Analysis
2. Network Management Application
NMC
Network Management Components
NMI
Nonmaskable Interrupt
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
NML
Network Management Layer
NMS
Network Management System
NMU
Network Management Unit
NN
National Number
NO
Normally Open
NOC
Network Operation Center
Node
A point where transmission lines originate, interconnect, switch, or terminate. Generally consists
of one or more pieces of equipment and is connected to other nodes via network facilities.
Typically provides switching capabilities, multiplexing capabilities, end-point termination or
origination, or other similar networking services. A point in the network where a network element
is physically located (such as a digital cross-connect system)
Nonblocking
A feature that allows any input port to be connected to any output port. Nonblocking switch paths
ensure that a connection can always be established between any two idle ports without
rearranging existing connections.
Nonregenerative
A type of optical amplification whereby the optical signal is amplified without being converted to
an electrical signal and then fed directly to the transmission line (as opposed to regenerative
amplification where the optical signal is first converted into an electrical signal, amplified,
converted back into an optical signal, and then fed to the transmission line).
Nonrevertive
As applied to protection switching, means that service is not automatically reestablished to
previously active device when failure is corrected.
NORM
NORMal
North American AIS

The accepted Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for use in North American Network, consisting of
alternating 1010 pattern with valid framing and fixed overhead bit content. (Also called Standard
AIS.)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Not Alarmed (NA)
A condition noted on the alarm manager screen, but does not cause an alarm situation to be
recorded.
Not Reported (NR)

A condition that is not reported on any screen.
NR
1. Normal
2. Not Reported
NRM
Normal Response Mode
NRZ
Nonreturn to Zero
NS
Narrow-Spaced (wavelength division multiplexing)
NSA
Nonservice-Affecting
NSAP
See Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
NSDU
Network Service Data Unit
NTE
Network Terminal Equipment
NTMS
Network Traffic Management System
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
O O-LAN
Office LAN
O1B
OC-3 Interface (module)
O4M
OC-12 Interface (module)
OA
Optical Amplifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OAD
Object Access Domain
OADM
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
OAM&P
Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
OAS
Optical Amplifier Section (per ITU-T G.681)
OBC
On-board Controller
OBPE
On-board Processor Element. The third-tier processing element in a 3-tier control system.
OC
Optical Carrier
OC-M
Optical Carrier, level M (for low-speed drops)
OC-N
Optical Carrier, level N (for high-speed drops)
OC1
Optical Carrier, level 1 (51.84 Mb/s)
OC12
OC12c
Optical Carrier, level 12 (622.08 Mb/s) Concatenated
OC192
Optical Carrier, level 192 (10 Gb/s)
OC24
Optical Carrier, level 24 (1.244 Gb/s)
OC3
OC3c
Optical Carrier, level 3 (155.52 Mb/s) Concatenated
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OC48
Optical Carrier, level 48 (2.488 Gb/s)
OCH
Optical CHannel. Maps sequentially from OTS 1-4, following individual channel assignments.
OCM
Optical Transceiver
OEM
Original Equipment Manufacturer
Off Normal
A term used in the telephone industry for operation action.
OH
OverHead, Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
OID
Object Identifier
OLH
Online Help
OMS
Optical Multiplex Section (per ITU-T G.681)
OOBFEC
Out-of-Band Forward Error Correction
OOF
Out of Frame
OOFP
Out of Frame-Path
OOS
See Out of Service (OOS).
OOS-AU
Out of Service-Autonomous. Entity is incapable of performing any of its provisioned functions,
and there is no external administrative restriction inhibiting the entity from performing these
functions. This state is entered when the network element detects an event rendering the entity
incapable of performing any of its provisioned functions. The event may be from the entity, a
supporting entity, or external network condition. In OOS-AU state, provisioning data updates and
service-affecting maintenance are not permitted.Fault detection is active.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OOS-AUMA
Out-of-Service-Autonomous Management
OOS-MA
1. Out-of-Service-Management
2. Out-of-Service-Memory administration
3. Traditionally called “Manual Out-of-service”. Entity is intentionally suspended by the
external management command performing all of its provisioned functions; entity is
operationally capable of performing its provisioning functions, although suspended by
external management. While in this state: Updates of provisioning data and maintenance
activities are permitted; physical actions, such as unplugging a circuit pack, will not generate
alarms; fault detection is performed; alarm notifications are suppressed; however, when
entering a new state without fault suppression, any new or cleared alarms that have not been
reported, must be. See also OOS-MA-UAS, which restricts maintenance and fault detection
activities.
OOS-MA-AS
Out-of-Service-Memory administration-Assigned
OOS-MA-MT
1. Out-of-Service-Management-Maintenance
2. Out-of-Service-Memory Administration-Maintenance
The entity has been manually removed from service for maintenance activity.
OOS-MA-UAS
1. Out-of-Service-Management-Unassigned
2. Out-of-Service-Memory Administration-Unassigned
The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning data. No service activity or
maintenance activity is permitted because the necessary data has not been assigned.
OOS-MT
Out-of-Service-Maintenance
OOS-UAS
Out-of-Service-Unassigned. The entity has not been assigned with the necessary provisioning
data; no service activity or maintenance activity is permitted because the necessary data has not
been assigned.
OPD
1. Optical Disk unit
2. Optical Disk Drive (module)
Open Systems Interconnection (OSI)

The only internationally accepted framework of standards for communication between different
systems made by different vendors. The primary intent for OSI is to create an open systems
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
networking environment in which any vendor computer system, connected to any network, can
freely share data with any other computer system on that network or a linked network. OSI was
developed by the International Standards Organization. Most of the dominant communications
protocols used have a structure based on the OSI model.
Operations Support System (OSS)

Methods and procedures (mechanized or not) that directly support the telecommunications
infrastructure daily operation. The average Local Exchange Carrier (LEC) has hundreds of OSSs,
including automated systems supporting order negotiation, order processing, line assignment, line
testing, and billing.
Operator Action
An operator-initiated action that interferes with the normal mechanism within the product for
response to detected conditions, such as forced switching, inhibited switching, or taking a
working module out of service.
OPS
Operations Processing System
OPS-INE
Operations System - Intelligent Network Element
OPS/INE
Operations Provisioning System for Intelligent Network Elements. An operations system used to
implement memory administration on NEs like the 1631 SX. Typically a Stratus computer with
software written by Bellcore.
Optical Carrier Level 1 (OC-1)

Optical signal that results from an optical conversion of an electrical STS-1 signal; this signal
forms the basis of the interface.

Optical signal produced by converting an STS-12 from an electrical signal to an optical signal.


Optical Carrier Level N (OC-N)

Optical signal resulting from an optical conversion of an electrical STS-N signal.
Optical Modules
Elements of the system that provide the photonic interface for either transmit or receive functions.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Optical Pulse Distortion/Dispersion
The property of an optical fiber that causes optical signals passing through the fiber to be
bandwidth limited. A received light pulse will be wider than that that was transmitted; the amount
of this distortion increases with the fiber length.
Option Button
A 1301 Network Manger Explorer (NMX) action button; represents a single choice in a limited
set of mutually exclusive choices. In a group of buttons user can select only one at any time.
ORB
Object Request Broker
Order Wire, Orderwire (OW)

1. A circuit used by telephone personnel for fixing, installing, and removing phone lines.
2. Equipment and circuit providing a telephone company the means to establish voice contact
between central office and carrier repeater locations.
3. A Synchronous Optical Network/Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SONET/SDH) term for a
connection request; consists of one octet contained within the Section Overhead (SOH).
ORS
Object Registration Service
OS
1. Operations System (Also called OSS.)
2. Operating System, as in HP-UX, DOS, or Windows 2000
OSB
Overhead Server Board
OSC
See Oscillator (OSC).
Oscillator (OSC)
1. A device for generating an analog test signal.
2. An electronic circuit that creates a single-frequency signal.
OSDB
Operations System Database
OSI
See Open Systems Interconnection (OSI).
OSL
Output Subscription Level
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
OSLINK
Operations System LINK has failed (X.25 link)
OSMINE
Operations Systems Modifications for the Integration of Network Elements.
OSPORT
Operations System Port
OSS
1. See Operations Support System (OSS) (Also called OS.)
2. Operating System Surveillance
OSSMAINT
Operations Support System - MAINTenance
OSSNMA
Operations Support System - Network Monitoring and Analysis
OSSPROV
Operations Support System - Provisioning
OSSTEST
Operations Support System - Testing
OTDR
Optical Time Domain Reflectometer
OTG
Online Troubleshooting Guide
OTGR
Operations Technology Generic Requirements. Bellcore requirements for network elements.
OTPROM
One-Time Programmable Read-only Memory
OTS
1. Object Transport Service
2. Optical Transmission Section (per ITU-T G.681)
3. Optical Transport System, a dense WDM system (per AT&T RFP)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Out of Service (OOS)
1. A status indication that function is not being performed by a given circuit pack and it can be
removed for maintenance.
2. An equipped module is OOS when unavailable for system use; module may be OOS for
operator action, equipment failure, diagnostic testing, or family of equipment not carrying
traffic. See also SNOS (Status, Not currently Out of Service).
3. Equipment or channel not carrying traffic.
4. Status indicating that traffic is not being processed by a given module and that the module can
be removed for maintenance.
5. Designation for an inactive address or function.
OV
OpenView
Overhead
Anything that is not traffic in a digital bit stream. Traffic is the payload, or information being
carried by signal. Overhead is that portion of signal that carries information about timing and
maintenance of signal, but does not carry any portion of information originally sent and meant to
be received at the far end.
OVFL
Overflow
OVw
OpenView Windows
OW
See Order Wire, Orderwire (OW),
OXB
Optical Transceiver (module)
OXO
Oven-Controlled Oscillator
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P P
Preferred
P-bus
Processor/Poll Bus - A multidrop CMOS serial bus that implements HDLC-NRM protocol for
normal polling of traffic
P39
3 V Power Converter (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
P56
5 V Power Converter (module)
PA
1. Parallel Alarm
2. Public Archive
PA/ST
Parallel Alarm/Serial Telemetry
Packet Switching
A communications paradigm in which packets (messages or fragments of messages) are
individually routed between nodes, with no previously established communication path. Packets
are routed to their destination through the most expedient route (as determined by some routing
algorithm). Not all packets traveling between the same two hosts, even those from a single
message, will necessarily follow the same route. The destination computer reassembles the
packets into their appropriate sequence. Packet switching optimizes available bandwidth use in a
network and minimizes latency. See also X.25.
PAD
Packet Assembler/Disassembler
Parameter
An element of a command, which further defines the object of the command or provides data
needed for proper command execution. See individual command descriptions.
Parity Check
A process for detecting whether bits of data (parts of characters) have been altered during
transmission of that data. Data are transmitted as a stream of bits with values of one or zero; for
example, each character of data composed of seven bits has another bit added to it. The value of
that bit is chosen so that either the total number of one bits is always even if Even Parity error
correction is to be obeyed, or always odd if Odd Parity correction is chosen.
Path
1. A path at a given bit rate is a logical connection between the point at which a standard frame
format for the signal is assembled and the point at which the standard frame format for the
signal is disassembled.
2. The route a telecommunications signal follows through a circuit or through the air.
Path command
Any valid connect or disconnect command directed to matrix
Path Overhead (POH)

Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) path overhead assigned to and transported with the
payload until payload is demultiplexed; used for functions necessary to transport the payload, for
example, end-to-end network management. These functions include parity check and trace
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
capability. POH is not implemented in SONET Lite. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).
Payload Pointer
The pointer that indicates the location of the beginning of the Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE).
PBIT
Parity monitoring. Select PBIT monitoring to monitor performance on signals other than CBIT
parity. PBIT is corrected at each DS3 level; therefore, it provides only error monitoring from DS3
electrical interface to DS3 interface.
PC
1. Personal computer.
2. For connectors, positive or physical connection.
PCA
See Protection Channel Access (PCA).
PCM
1. See Pulse Code Modulation (PCM).
2. PCM is also slang for the Sony F1 format, which stores PCM digital audio on videotape.
PCN
Product Change Notice.
PCS
Privileged Command Script.
PDN
Public Data Network
PDU
Power Distribution Unit.
PECL
Positive Electron-Coupled Logic.
Peer or PEER
1. A unit of communications hardware or software on the same protocol layer of a network as
another. A common way of viewing a communications link is as two protocol stacks that are
actually connected only at the very lowest (physical) layer, but can be regarded as being
connected at each higher layer by virtue of the lower layers services provided. Peer-to-peer
communication refers to these real or virtual connections between corresponding systems in
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
each layer. For example, when two people talk to each other, the lowest layer is the physical
layer, the sound waves traveling from mouth to ear (so mouths and ears are peers). The next
layer might be the speech and hearing centers in the brains and the top layer their cerebellums
or minds. Although, barring telepathy, nothing passes directly between the two minds, there is
a peer-to-peer communication between them.
2. User security channel identifier
Performance Monitoring (PM)

Reports and analyzes deviations from defined parameters, detecting any signal degradation that
could lead to a service-affecting failure; refers to actions that monitor signal integrity and quality
(such as counting parity errors in Synchronous Optical Network [SONET] equipment) and
equipment impairments (such as laser degrade). Nominally includes reporting of values recorded
during monitoring and sending them over a digitally multiplexed transmission channel.
Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC)

A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit
establishment and tear-down.
PEROM
Programmable Erasable Read-only Memory
Persistence
Continuity of the state of an object across reboots; a property of a programming language where
created objects and variables continue to exist and retain their values between runs of the
program.
PES
Parity Errored Second
PFO
Premium Feature Option
PG
Point Generator
PGA
Pin Grid Array
Phase-Locked Loop (PLL)

A circuit containing a voltage-controlled oscillator whose phase or frequency can be “steered” to
keep it in sync with a reference source. A PLL circuit is generally used to lock onto and
“up-convert” the frequency of a stable source.
Physical network
The actual equipment in a communications network.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Pi Mux
A configuration of Add-Drop Multiplex (ADM) circuit that uses a back-to-back terminal type of
repeater configuration, allowing add/drop of channels in either or both directions independently.
An application of this configuration is thinning routes. The configuration is similar to a pair of 1:1
terminals back-to-back. Pi mux is correctly referred to as Linear ADM (LADM). Compare with T
Mux.
PIC
Programmable Interrupt Controller
PID
1. Password Identifier
2. Path Identification
3. Product Identifier
Pigtail
A length of optical fiber with one end terminated at a connector and the other end attached to a
light source or detector. The fiber couples light from a source to a connectorized fiber cable or
from a fiber cable to a detector.
PIN
1. Positive Intrinsic Negative. Type of photo detector used to sense light wave energy then to
convert it to electrical signals.
2. A type of semiconductor diode that has a 3-layer structure composed of P-type, intrinsic type,
and N-type material.
PJC
Pointer Justification Count
PJN
Pointer Justification Negative
PJP
Pointer Justification Positive
PLD
Programmable Logic Device
PLL
Phase-Locked Loop. See Phase-Locked Loop (PLL).
PM
See Performance Monitoring (PM).
PMC
Process Monitory and Control
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PMV
Performance Monitoring Visualization
PNM
Physical Network Manager
POH
See Path Overhead (POH).
Point of Presence (POP)

1. A physical place within a Local Access and Transport Area (LATA) where a long-distance
carrier or a cellular provider interfaces with the network of the Local Exchange Carrier
(LEC), also called the local telephone company.
2. The point at which the LEC terminates subscriber circuits for cellular phone call,
long-distance dial-up phone call, or leased-line communications.
3. A meet point where Internet Service Providers (ISPs) exchange traffic and routes.
Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP)

A communications protocol; the protocol defined in RFC 1661, the Internet standard for
transmitting network layer datagrams (for example, IP packets) over serial point-to-point links.
PPP is designed to operate over asynchronous connections and bit-oriented synchronous systems.
It can configure connections to a remote network dynamically and test that the link is usable. PPP
can be configured to encapsulate different network layer protocols by using appropriate Network
Control Protocol (NCP).
Polarization Mode Dispersion (PMD)

Identified around 1990, PMD might become a limiting issue in optical span design now that data
rates are going higher (10 Gb/s and 40 Gb/s), and spans are getting longer. PMD is the dispersion
of an optical signal, caused by the different polarization modes of the optical signal traveling
down a fiber at slightly different velocities. The amount of PMD is statistical in nature and varies
randomly with time. PMD is independent of chromatic dispersion, so a span can be PMD-limited
in distance even in the absence of chromatic dispersion. Due to the random nature of the physical
causes of PMD, it is more difficult to be compensated for, as chromatic dispersion, but newer
techniques are being developed. See also Chromatic Dispersion.
POP
See Point of Presence (POP).
Port
1. A physical connection on a network element that has a specified rate and type of physical
attachment; a connection or socket on the computer. Ports are used for connecting devices
(cables, modems, printers, monitors) to a PC, then sending information from the computer to
the devices. Serial ports (COM 1-COM 4) and parallel ports (LPT1, LPT2) are the most
commonly used.
2. An interface point between the system and its external environment. Can be physical, logical,
or both.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Portability
Software designed for one computer system can be used on other systems; little software outside
MS-DOS software for IBM and IBM clone computers is portable; UNIX software is portable to
an extent.
PPP
Point-to-Point Protocol. See Point-to-Point Protocol (PPP).
PPS
Path Protection Switching. See Protection Switching (PS).
PPSN
Public Packet Switched Network
PRI
1. Primary (alarm)
2. Primary Rate Interface. See Primary Rate Interface (PRI).
3. Protection Release Inhibited
Primary Rate Interface (PRI)

PRI is intended for heavy-duty users. The typical channel structure is composed of 23 B channels
plus one 64 Kb/s D channel for a total of 1536 Kb/s.
PRM
Performance Report Messages
PRN
Printer
PROT
PROTection
Protection Channel Access (PCA)

The tributary signals carried by the protection channel when it is offline (i.e., not protecting the
working traffic). It is lower priority and will be dropped in favor of the working traffic in the
event of a working channel failure.
Protection Switch Count (PSC)

The Performance Monitoring (PM) parameter used to count the number of protection switches for
a protection group.
Protection Switch Oscillation Control (PSOC)

A policy (for 1680 OGM) replacing Switch Hold in which alarm conditions (i.e. signal fail or
degrade) are “locked” on a facility for a period of time after a number of alarm oscillations have
occurred. This state is called Alarm Lock; while active, it causes a facility to be treated as though
the locked alarm were active. This policy accomplishes prevention of rapid switching oscillation
in a much cleaner fashion than Switch Hold. Also, it directly addresses requirements CR5-52 and
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R5-53 of GR-253-CORE, which Switch Hold does not.
Protection Switching (PS)

The automatic Network Element (NE) function that provides recovery of traffic in the event of a
network or equipment failure. Protection may be an individual NE function (as in unidirectional
linear protection or in a unidirectional ring) or a network function (as in bidirectional linear
protection or in a bidirectional ring).
Protection Switching Duration (PSD)

This parameter measures the total time, in seconds, for which service was removed from a given
(nonprotection) line.
Protection Switching Line, Counts

This parameter measures the number of times service switches from a particular working line to a
protection line.
Protocol
A set of rules that govern the interaction of processes or applications in a system or network
PROV
See Provisioning (PROV).
ProvData
Provisioning Data
Provision
Transmission of TL1 messages to a Network Element (NE) to modify the NE database.
Provisioning allows for modification of the NE options, configuration, connection, and
cross-connections.
Provisioning (PROV)
1. The act of providing operational transmission service by performing the following tasks:
equipping (or installing modules and equipment), configuring, and setting the data path In
Service (IS) or Out of Service (OOS).
2. The entry into a network image of network resources that are installed in network image and
are available for assignment.
Proxy
Provides protocol conversion between TL1 commands and Common Management Information
Service Element (CMISE) commands.
PRS
Primary Reference System
PRT
DS1 Protect (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PRT
DS1 Protect (module)
PSA
Power Supply Alarm
PSC
See Protection Switch Count (PSC).
PSCC
Processor Serial Control Circuit
PSD
Protection Switching Duration
PSF
5 V Power Supply (module)
PSN
Packet-switched Network. See Packet Switching. See also X.25.
PSOC
See Protection Switch Oscillation Control (PSOC).
PSOS
Portable Scalable Operating System. See Portability. See also Scalable.
PSU
Power Supply Unit
PSW
Protect Switch
PTA
Port and Telecommunications Administration
PTE
Path-Terminating Equipment. See also DS0 Path-Terminating Equipment (DS0 PTE).
Pulse Code Modulation (PCM)

A method by which an audio signal is represented as digital data. Virtually all digital audio
systems use PCM.
PVC
1. Permanent Virtual Channel
2. See Permanent Virtual Circuit (PVC).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
3. Permanent Virtual Connection (Asynchronous Transfer Mode [ATM] terminology)
4. Polyvinyl Chloride
PWM
Pulse-Width Modulator
PWR
1. Power
2. Power converter
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Q Q3
Reference point between two layers in the TNM model
QRS
Quasi-Random Signal
QRSF
Quasi-Random Signal, Framed
QRSS
Quasi-Random Signal Source. Signals used for testing digital circuits, particularly DS-1 (for
example, T-1) circuits.
QRSU
Quasi-Random Signal, Unframed
QTY
Quantity
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
R R
Redundant
R-bus
Remote Inventory Bus. A bidirectional CMOS/TTL level serial data bus, provides access to the
remote inventory data bank on each circuit pack.
Rack
An assembly of shelves within a standard set of vertical mounting posts or rails (called rack
channels).
RADM
Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer
RADMAP
Remote Alarm Display Map
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RAM
See Random Access Memory (RAM).
Random Access Memory (RAM)

The working memory of the card; memory used for storing data temporarily while working on it,
running application programs, etc. “Random access” means that any RAM area can be accessed
directly and immediately. RAM is called volatile memory; information in RAM will disappear if
the power is switched off before it is saved to disk. RAM is used on all downloadable cards to run
the application loads of the cards.
Range of terms
The beginning and ending terms separated by two ampersands and a hyphen (&&-). For example,
range T3-8&&-12 expands to {T3-8, T3-9, T3-10, T3-11, T3-12}.
RBD
1. Rear Beam Detect
2. Rear Beam Photo Detector
RCC
Relay Contact-closure Control
RCV
Receive module
RDI
Remote Defect Indication
RDU
Rack Distribution Unit (module)
Redundancy, Redundant
1. That part of any message that may be eliminated without losing important information.
2. Having one or more “backup” systems available in case of failure of the main system.
Remote Defect Indication-Line (RDI-L)

An indication returned to a transmitting Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE) upon receipt of a line
Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) code or detection of an incoming line failure at the receiving LTE.
(Formerly Line Far-end Receive Failure [FERF].)
Revertive
Service is automatically restored to the primary device after failure is corrected.
RFI
Radio Frequency Interference
RFS
Remote File Server
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
RI
Remote Inventory
Ring
A network where the network nodes are interconnected by means of a circular route that may be
broken at any one point without permanently disrupting traffic. Rings are either unidirectional
(uniring) or bidirectional (bi-ring).
Ring Add-Drop Multiplexer (RADM)

Network element in a ring network that provides access to all N, or some subset M (M is a
standard hierarchical level v N), of the STS line signals contained within an OC-N optical
channel. STS signals are added to (inserted) and/or dropped from (extracted) the OC-N signal as it
passes through the ADM. Ring ADMs may be either unidirectional (uniring) or bidirectional
(bi-ring).
RIP
Routing Information Protocol
RMAS
Remote Memory Administration System
RMS
Root Means Square
Roll
An operation that switches (rolls) a cross-connection from one output port to another with no
disruption of service
Route Diversity
A network configuration that provides two connection paths between two points, each physically
separated from the other except at the terminal end points. This method retains service over one of
the routes if the other route is broken (such as when a cable is cut). A route diversity application
can be built using a ring network or a linear network as a basis.
RPB
Ring Protect Board (module)
RPC
1. Redundant Power Converter
2. Remote Procedure Call
RS-232
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard using serial binary data
interchange standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal Equipment (DTE); the most
common asynchronous serial line standard; the EIA equivalent of ITU-T V.24 and V.28. RS-232
specifies connector gender and pin use, but not their physical type (RS-423 specifies the electrical
signals.); 25-way D-type connectors are common but often only three wires are connected: one
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
ground (pin seven) and one for data in each direction; other pins are mostly related to hardware
handshaking between sender and receiver and to carrier detection on modems, inoperative
circuits, busy conditions etc. The standard classifies equipment as either Data Communications
Equipment (DCE) or DTE.
RS-232C
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) standard applicable to interconnection of Data Terminal
Equipment (DTE) and Data Communication Equipment (DCE) using serial binary data
interchange.
RS-422
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) standard that specifies the electrical characteristics of a
balanced voltage digital interface circuit for the interchange of serial binary signals between Data
Terminal Equipment (DTE) and Data Communications Equipment (DCE).
RS-449
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard employing synchronous
serial binary data interchange
RS-485
An Electronic Industry Association (EIA) data communications standard for high-speed, long
distance multipoint connections
RSP
Rack Status Panel (module)
RT
Remote Terminal
RTC
Real-time Clock
RTN
Return
RTU
Remote Test Unit
RX
Receive, receiver
RX+TX
Receiver plus Transceiver
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
S S3M
STM Interface (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SA
Service-Affecting
SABM
Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode
SAM
System Administrator Manager
SARTS
Switched Access Remote Test System
SAS
Severe errored frame/Alarm indication signal (SEF/AIS) Second
SBI
Serial Bus Interface
SBT
System Bus Termination (module)
SC
A specific type of fiber-optic cable connector. Scalable
Scalable
Often refers to technology applications that can be made greater or smaller without great leaps in
cost. for example, Virtual Private Networks (Switched 56/64, X.25, Frame Relay, Switched
Multimegabit Data Service (SMDS), and Asynchronous Transfer Mode [ATM] networks) serve as
effective replacements for dedicated, leased-line networks because their capabilities are scalable,
with the costs remaining in reasonable relationship to associated functionality.
SCC
Serial Communications Controller
SCHED
Schedule
SCI
See Serial Communications Interface (SCI).
SCO
Serial Communications interface data from shelf processor to microcontroller.
SCS
Center Stage Switch
SCSI
Small Computer System Interface. A bus that links the optical and hard disks to the processor.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SCU
Stratum Clock Unit
SDC
Serial-to-Dual-bit Converter
SDCC
Section Data Communications Channel. See also Data Communications Channel (DCC).
SDH
See Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH).
SDMA
Serial Direct Memory Access
SEA
Supported Entity Outage
SEC
1. Secondary
2. Security Manager
Section
The portion of a transmission facility (including terminating points) between a terminal network
element and a regenerator or between two regenerators. A terminating point is the point after
signal regeneration, where Performance Monitoring (PM) is or can be done. In Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET), the section envelope encompasses the line envelope. See also
Synchronous Payloads.
Section-Terminating Equipment (STE)

Network elements that terminate the Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) physical and
section layers. STE is either a regenerator or part of a Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE). STEs
interpret and either modify or create the section SONET overhead.
SEEPROM
Serially Electronically Erasable Programmable Read-only Memory
SEF
Severely Errored Frame
SEFS
Severely Errored Frame Seconds
Send Button
A 1301 Network Manger (NM) action button that forwards commands to the network element.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Seq
Sequence
Serial Communications Interface (SCI)

An asynchronous full-duplex serial data link between the shelf processor and modules containing
microcontrollers. Card Presence Indicator (CPI), SCI, and Serial Communications (SCO)
interface data signals comprise this link.
Service Condition
A data path can be selected as In Service (IS), which is the normal operational state, or
Out-of-service (OOS) condition, which disables protection switching and alarm and Performance
Monitoring (PM) functions. An OOS data path may or may not be able to carry test traffic,
depending on system configuration.
SESCP
Severely Errored Seconds-CP-bit Path
SESL
Severely Errored Seconds-Line
SESP
Severely Errored Seconds-Path
Session
1. A logical network connection between two addressable units for the exchange of data.
2. A connection between a user and the Network Element (NE). One user can have multiple
sessions. All provisioning operations, queries, and autonomous reports are transported
between the NE and user through a session.
Severely Errored Seconds (SES)

Contains more than N Coding Violations (CVs). The value of N with frame size and bit rate
should be chosen to correspond to a Bit Error Ratio (BER) of approximately 10-3, assuming
errors are randomly distributed. This count may be used to determine problems for particular
types of services and/or as a measure of facility outage duration.
SF
1. See Signal Fail (SF).
2. See Superframe (SF).
SFF
1. TSI Switch Frame Format
2. Superframe Format (DS1 signal)
SFFT1
STS-1 Fast Facility Protection Threshold 1
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SFFT2
SFFT3
SFT
First/Third Stage Switch
SGND
Signal Ground
Shelf
Basic rack assembly unit; contains subassemblies (usually circuit packs, also referred to as
modules).
Short Band
The shorter wavelength half of the Erbium-Doped Fiber Amplifier (EDFA) amplification window
that is approximately 1530 nm to 1543 nm.
Short Reach (SR)

A Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) term; refers to optical sections of approximately 2
kilometers or less in length. The sections may be interoffice or intraoffice. Compare with Long
Reach (LR).
SI36
SONET I/O 36 STS-1 rack or shelf
SI48
SONET I/O 48 DS3/STS-1 rack or shelf
SIB
System Integration Block
SID
1. System Identification. A five-digit number assigned to identify the particular cellular carrier
from whom one is obtaining service; identifies “home” system.
2. System Identifier. An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or
site within the network.
3. Site Identifier
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SID/NSAP
See System Identification/ Network Service Access Point (SID/NSAP).
Signal Fail (SF)

1. Also known as Loss of Signal (LOS), detection of a LOS, Loss of Frame (LOF), or Loss of
Pointer (LOP) on the lines or on tributaries (for example, OC12s) connected to the system.
2. Threshold value used to compare calculated Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER) value with SF
threshold. If BER value is less than SF threshold, an Excessive BER (EXBER) condition is
declared. See also Bit Error Rate (or Ratio) (BER).
Simplex (SX)
1. Operating a channel in one direction only with no ability to operate in the other direction.
2. One-sided printing.
SIO
Serial Input/Output (module)
SIS
Selectable (DS1) Idle Signal
SKP
Skip
SLC
Smart Line Card
SLM
Single Longitudinal Mode (laser)
SLTP
Section/Line Terminating Processor
SLU
Standard-to-Large Upgrade
SM
1. SONET (Synchronous Optical Network) Multiplexer. See Synchronous Optical Network
(SONET). See also Multiplex (MUX, Mx).
2. Subrate Multiplexer. See also SRM.
SMC
1. Standard Matrix Configuration.
2. Switching Matrix Circuit.
SMF
System Managment Function
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SML
1. Small Machine Language
2. Synchronous Maintenance Link
SMPS
Switched-Mode Power Supply
SMS
Small Machine Shelf
SMT
Matrix Terminator
SN
Subscriber Number
SNIDER
Asynchronous ASCII Echoplex Protocol (A trademark of Bellcore.)
SNML
Sub-Network Management Layer
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SNOS
Status, Not currently Out of Service. In the 1680 OGM this is a TL1 error code returned when a
user attempts to place an entity Out of Service (OOS) when it is already OOS.
SOC
Standard Operating Conditions
Software Generic
A set of files representing a software release for an NE
SOH
Section Overhead
SOIC
Small Outline Integrated Circuit
SOM
Second of Minute
SONET
See Synchronous Optical Network (SONET).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Span
1. Refers to the optical fiber(s) connecting one site to another site; that portion of a high-speed
digital system that connects a Central Office (CO) or terminal office to terminal office.
2. Also called a T-Span Line; a repeated outside plant four-wire, two twisted-pair transmission
line.
3. A call center term: the total duration of a schedule from start time to stop time, including all
breaks.
SPB
Satellite Processor (module)
SPC
1. Shelf Processor Card.
2. Serial-to-Parallel Converter
3. Serial Parallel Chip
SPE
Synchronous Payload Envelope. See also Synchronous Payloads.
SPI
Serial Peripheral Interface.
SPL
DS1 Splitter
SPLTA
Split Connection, A Side
SPLTB
Split Connection, B Side
SPLTE
Split Connection, Equipment Side
SPLTEF
Split Connection, Equipment and Facility Sides
SPLTF
Split Connection, Facility Side
SPRAM
Single-Port Random Access Memory
SPU
Shelf Processor Unit
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
SR
See Short Reach (SR).
SRAM
Static Random Access Memory
SRDM
Subrate Digital Multiplexing
SRM
Subrate Multiplexer. See also SM.
SSP
System Status Panel
SST
Secondary State
SSU
1. Subrate Service Unit
2. Synchronization Supply Unit. See also Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).
Standard AIS
The accepted Alarm Indication Signal (AIS) for use in North American Network, consisting of
alternating 1010 pattern with valid framing and fixed overhead bit content (Also called North
American AIS.)
Status Points
Electrical circuit activation points; provide a mechanism for electrical control circuits exterior to
the product to notify it that a specific event has occurred; provide confirmation that control-point
initiated actions have occurred, and/or monitor local office environmental alarm conditions, such
as power failure, fire, and temperature.
Status Response
When an operator enters a command into the product through the user interface, each command
entered will receive a status response to indicate the success or failure of the command.
STBY
Standby
STBYC
Cold Standby
STBYH
Standby Hot, secondary service state; indicates that the entity is providing hot standby redundant
protection.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STC
STS-1 Transport Conditioner
STD
Standard
STE
Section-Terminating Equipment
STM-1
Synchronous Transport Module, level 1
STM-16
STM-4
STM-N
Synchronous Transport Module, Level N
STNE
Sectionalize Trouble Network Element
STP
STS-1 Transport Protect
STS Envelope Capacity

Bandwidth within and aligned to the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) frame that carries the
STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE). This bandwidth can be combined from N STS1s to
carry an STS-Nc SPE. See also STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE).
STS Path Overhead (STS POH)

Nine evenly distributed path overhead bytes per 125 μs starting at the first byte of the
Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE); provides for
communication between creation and disassembly points of the STS SPE.
STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) payload.
STS PTEs interpret and either modify or create the STS Path Overhead (STS POH) necessary to
transport the STS payload.
STS Payload Capacity

The maximum bandwidth within the Synchronous Transport Signal Synchronous Payload
Envelope (STS SPE) available for payload. See also STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS
SPE).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
STS POH
See STS Path Overhead (STS POH).
STS PTE
See STS Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE).
STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE)

A 125-ms frame structure composed of Synchronous Transport Signal Path Overhead (STS POH)
and bandwidth for payload. See also STS Path Overhead (STS POH).
STS-1
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 1; the basic logical building block Synchronous Optical
Network (SONET) electrical signal with a rate of 51.84 Mb/s.
STS-12c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 12.
STS-3
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3
STS-3c
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level 3. A concatenated signal is formed by linking 3
STS-1 signals together, which allows transport of payloads larger than the capacity of an STS-1.
An STS-3c payload consists of 2349 bytes (3 783).
STS-48
Synchronous Transport Signal, level 48.
STS-N
Synchronous Transport Signal, level N.
STS-Nc
Concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal, level N. The concatenated signal is formed by
linking N STS-1 signals together. For example, an STS-3c payload consists of N x 783 bytes.
STS-SPE
See STS Synchronous Payload Envelope (STS SPE) and STS Envelope Capacity.
STSX-1
Electronic Synchronous Transport Signal, level 1. Digital signal cross-connect point for
equipment that generates or uses STS1 signals. This point has defined wave shapes and voltage
levels, per Bell Communications Research; Technical Reference TR-NWT-000253.
Super Rate Signal

A signal that must be carried by a concatenated Synchronous Transport Signal (STS), level N
(STS-Nc). Payloads larger than one STS-1 are known as super-rate payloads.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Super-Rate Payload
Payload larger than one STS-1.
Superframe (SF)
One possible framing format for a DS1 signal (corresponding to D4). Unlike Extended
Superframe (ESF), there is no sync messaging channel in an SF signal. Compare with Extended
Superframe (ESF).
SVC
Switched Virtual Circuit. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).
SWDL
Software Downloaded
SWI
DS1 Switch (module)
Switch Exercise
An exercise of the K-Byte protocol that coordinates protection switching between network
elements. Traffic is not effected by an exercise (for example, no bridge, select, or squelch
operations occur).
Switch Hold
A policy adopted in Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) Multiplexer products prior to the
Enhanced in which switching would be disallowed for a period of time after X number of
switches had occurred in a specified time period. Purpose: to prevent rapid oscillation between
facilities or equipment when Wait to Restore (WTR) did not prevent it.
SX
1. Identifier for Alcatel Digital Cross-connect product family.
2. See also Simplex (SX).
SYNC
Synchronous. Events that are phase and frequency locked to a common timing reference.
Synchronization Supply Unit (SSU)

See Building Integrated Timing Supply (BITS).
Synchronous
The essential characteristic of time scales or signals in which their corresponding significant
instants occur at precisely the same average rate.
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

European set of standard fiber-optic-based serial standards planned for use with Synchronous
Optical Network (SONET) and Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM); some SDH and SONET
standards are identical; standardized by the International Telecommunications Union (ITU). See
also Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) and Synchronous Optical Network (SONET).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Synchronous Network
The synchronization of the payloads of a transmission system to a master (network) clock that can
be traced to a reference clock.
Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)

A family of fiber-optic transmission rates (51.84 Mb/s to 13.22 Gb/s), created to provide needed
flexibility to transport many digital signals with different capacities, and to provide a design
standard. SONET is an optical interface standard that allows interworking of transmission
products from multiple vendors; it defines physical interface, optical line rates (optical carrier
[OC] signals), frame format, and an Operations, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning
(OAM&P) protocol. A standard for interconnecting digital networks and light wave systems
agreed upon by most major manufacturers. SONET supports new broadband services, and
enhanced OAM&P. This standard permits connecting SONET-compatible equipment of one
manufacturer to SONET-compatible equipment of another manufacturer on the other end. All
present services, such as DS1s, DS2s, DS3s, LANs, etc., can be brought onto a hub and interfaced
with SONET.
Synchronous Payloads
Payloads derivable from a network transmission signal by removing integral numbers of bits in
every frame; (for example, there are no variable bit stuffing rate adjustments required to fit the
payload in the transmission signal).
Synchronous Signal
A signal associated with a clock, or timing, signal. Clock moves data from one point to another.
NRZ signals are usually synchronous.
Synchronous Transport Module

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving four STM-1 signals together. The rate of the
STM-4 is 622.080 Mb/s.
Synchronous Transport Module Level 1 (STM-1)

The basic Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 155.520 Mb/s. European SDS building block that equates to STS3.
Synchronous Transport Module Level 4 (STM-4)

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving four STM-1 signals together. The rate of the
STM-4 is 622.080 Mb/s. European Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) building block that
equates to STS12.
Synchronous Transport Signal Level 1 (STS1)

The basic Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) logical building block electrical signal with a
rate of 51.84 Mb/s.
Synchronous Transport Signal Level N (STS-N)

This electrical signal is obtained by byte interleaving N STS1 signals together. The rate of the
STS-N is N times 51.84 Mb/s.
System Identification/Network Service Access Point (SID/NSAP)

....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
An alphanumeric designator that uniquely identifies a particular system or site within a network.
See also Network Service Access Point (NSAP).
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
T T Mux
A configuration of Add-Drop Multiplex (ADM) circuit that uses a back-to-back terminal type of
repeater configuration that allows add/drop of channels; used in ring networks. This configuration
differs from pi mux in that it may receive from either direction but always sends in both
directions. This configuration typically uses only one optical channel. Compare with Pi Mux.
T0
Digital transmission link with a capacity of 64 kb/s (DS0)
T1
1. A collective term referring to the DS1 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 1.544 Mb/s (DS1)
T1DM
T1 Digital Multiplex Format
T3
1. A collective term referring to the DS3 facility as a whole. Refers to traffic-carrying circuits
rather than to modules.
2. Digital transmission link with a capacity of 44.736 Mb/s (DS3)
TABS
Telemetry Asynchronous Block, Serial. A protocol used to collect data on alarms and performance
monitoring. (A registered trademark of Bellcore.)
TACC
Test Access
TADRMAP
Target identifier ADdress Resolution Map
TAP
1. Test Access Port
2. Test Access Path
3. Trouble Analysis Procedures
TAPP
Test Access Port Pair
Target Identifier (TID)

Number that may be null (missing). TIDs identify which network element receives a Transaction
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Language 1 (TL1) message.
TARP
Target identifier Address Resolution Protocol
TASSA
Technical Assistance and Software Support Agreement
TB
Test Busy (diagnostic)
TB1
Terminal Block 1
TBD
To Be Determined
TBOS
See Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS).
TCA
See Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA).
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. A networking protocol that provides
communication across interconnected networks, between computers with diverse hardware
architectures and various operating systems.
TCXO
Temperature-Compensated Crystal Oscillator
TDM
1. Time Division Multiplexed
2. See also Time Division Multiplexing (TDM).
TDSN
Time Division Subchannel Number
TEC
Thermo-Electric Cooler
TEL
Telemetry module. See Telemetry Module (TEL).
Telemetry Byte-Oriented Serial (TBOS)

Protocol for transmitting alarm, status, and control points between network element and
operations system. TBOS is described in AT&T Communications Compatibility Bulletin No. 149,
Issue 2.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Telemetry Module (TEL)
A generic name given to synchronization modules in the 1648 SM product.
Terminal
An end point or a device connected to same.
Threshold Crossing Alert (TCA)

Threshold crossing parameters are values assigned to specific types of error conditions. The
values represent the number of times that condition occurs within a 15-minute or 1-day time
frame. If the number of occurrences exceeds the threshold value, a TCA situation displays on the
appropriate Performance Monitoring (PM) screen. See also Performance Monitoring (PM).
TID
See Target Identifier (TID).
TIE
Time Interval Error
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)

A type of multiplexing where two or more channels of information are transmitted over the same
link by allocating a different time interval (“slot” or “slice”) for the transmission of each channel.
(For example: The channels take turns to use the link. Typically a periodic synchronizing signal or
distinguishing identifier is required so the receiver can determine which channel is which. TDM
becomes inefficient when traffic is intermittent because the time slot remains allocated even when
the channel has no data to transmit. Statistical TDM was developed to overcome this problem.
Compare with Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) and Code Division Multiplexing (CDM).
Time Slot
1. In time division multiplexing or switching, the slot belonging to a voice, data, or video
conversation; it can be occupied with conversation or left blank, but the slot is always present.
The capacity of the switch or the transmission channel can be determined by figuring how
many slots are present.
2. The smallest switchable data unit on the SCbus or SCxbus data bus. A time slot consists of
eight consecutive bits of data. One time slot is equivalent to a data path with a bandwidth of
64 Kpbs. (A Signal Computing System Architecture [SCSA] term.)
TIRKS
Trunks Integrated Record Keeping System (A registered trademark of Bellcore.)
TL1
See Transaction Language 1 (TL1).
TL1 DAT
Transaction Language 1 Direct Access Terminal
TLP
Transmission Level Point
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TLS
Terminate-and-Leave State
TM
Terminal Multiplexer
TMAS
Transport, Maintenance, and Administration System
TMB
TSI Muldem module
TMC
Transmux Converter
TMN
Telecommunications Management Network
TOD
Time of Day
TP
Termination Point
TPS
Transmission Processing System
TPU
1. Tape Unit
2. TABS Points Upgrade
Transaction Language 1 (TL1)

A Bellcore-specified protocol for communication between network elements; a subset of CCITT
MML Standard.
Transparent
An action or activity that is not apparent to the user or device.
Transport
Facilities associated with the transmission of OC1 or higher-level signals.
Transport Overhead
The overhead added to Synchronous Transport Signal (STS) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) for transport; consists of Line and Section overhead.
TRM
Bus Termination (module)
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
TS0.
Time Slot Zero
TSC
Technical Support Center
TSC
Test Session Controller
TSGR
Test Signal Generator
TSI
Time Slot Interchange
TSI
Time Slot multiplexer
TSID
1. Test Signal Identification
2. Transmission Identification
TSS
Third Stage Switch
TTL
Transistor-to-Transistor Logic
TTY
Teletype Terminal (keyboard-equipped terminal with no cursor-addressable display)
TVA
Topology Viewer Application
TX
Transmitter, transmit path
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
U UA
Unnumbered Acknowledgement
UART
See Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART).
UASCP
Unavailable Seconds-CP-bit Path
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UASL
Unavailable Seconds-Line
UASP
Unavailable Seconds-Path
UB
User Board
UBPE
User Board Processor Element
UCAL
User Community Authorization Level
UCFC
User Community Functional Category
UCFCI
User Community Functional Category Input
UCFCO
User Community Functional Category Output
UDR
See Unidirectional Ring (UDR).
UDS
Unit Data Sheet
UEQ
Unequipped. Equipment entity is not equipped with necessary hardware.
UI
User Interface
UID
User Identifier
UL
Underwriters Laboratories
UNAM
User name
Unassigned (X-Bits/Bytes)
Those locations within the signal that do not have an assigned function or value; receiver ignores
the value of these bytes (except for BIP-8 calculation/verification).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Unavailable Seconds (UAS)
The parameter UAS measures the duration for which service was unavailable (in seconds).
Service becomes unavailable if 10 consecutive Severely Errored Seconds (SES) occur. When the
service becomes unavailable, it remains unavailable until 10 consecutive non severely errored
seconds.
UNEQ-P
Unequipped-Path
Unequipped Channel
A portion of an STS-N such as an STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE) or an intentionally
unoccupied Virtual Tributary (VT) SPE.
Unequipped Indication
A code that originating equipment places in unequipped channels to indicate to Path-Terminating
Equipment (PTE) that the channel is intentionally unoccupied so that alarms may be inhibited.
UNFR
Unframed DS1 signal format
Unidirectional Ring (UDR)

Ring networks that send the same traffic over two different routes (for example, counter-rotating
paths) to each node in the network. This allows the node to select one direction or the other for its
own traffic for protection purposes. Rings send all traffic through each node. Rings also permit
add/drop of channels at any node using a T Mux.
Unidirectional Switching
The protection switching scheme whereby the failed path is switched to the protection path, but
the path in the other direction is not switched.
Universal Asynchronous Receiver/Transmitter (UART)

A device, usually an integrated circuit chip, that performs the parallel-to-serial conversion of
digital data to be transmitted and the serial-to-parallel conversion of digital data received;
converts incoming serial data from a modem (or whatever else is connected to the serial port) into
the parallel form the Personal Computer (PC) handles. Parallel data conversion into serial data
makes data suitable for asynchronous transmission on phone lines. PCs have a serial port used for
bringing data into and out of the computer; this serial port is used for data movement on a channel
that requires that one bit be sent (or received) after another, serially; UART chips control PC serial
ports.
Unprotected Operation
A network element (usually a terminal) where the individual transport element does not provide
traffic protection; a higher network device, such as a cross-connect, provides protection by
moving the traffic from the failed transmission path to other paths in the network.
UPPS
Unidirectional Path Protection Switching
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
UPSR
Unidirectional Path Switched Ring
USDB
User Security Database
User Channel
This is allocated to the user for input of information such as data communication for use in
maintenance activities and remoting of alarms external to the span equipment in a proprietary
fashion.
USI
User System Interface. More commonly referred to as Communication Interface Unit (CIU). Also
called CID or CPORT.
USI-LAN
User System Interface-Local Area Network
USM
User Services Manager
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
V V5
Virtual tributary path overhead. See Virtual Tributary (VT).
VA
Volt-Amperes
VC
1. Virtual Channel
2. Virtual Container
3. See also Virtual Circuit (VC).
VCN
Virtual Channel Number
VCXO
Voltage-Controlled Crystal Oscillator
Vdc
Volts Direct Current
VDT
Video Display Terminal. Keyboard-equipped terminal with cursor-addressable display.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VF
1. Voice Frequency
2. Variable Factor. An Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) term; , a relative measure of the cell
rate margin normalized by the variance of the aggregate cell rate on the link.
VGA
1. Virtual Graphics Application
2. Variable Graphics Array
VI
Valid Interrupt
Violation Monitoring and Removal (VMR)

Process by which parity errors are corrected at a switch and section. Equivalent to an infinite stop
filter in a Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM) system. Only parity violations are removed;
the bit errors that caused them still exist. Detected violations are removed so they do not
propagate beyond maintenance span.
Virtual Circuit (VC)

A communications line, voice or data, that appears to the user to be a dedicated point-to-point
circuit. VCs are generally set up on a per call basis and disconnected when the call is ended; VC
concept was first used in data communications with packet switching; VCs have become more
common in ultra-high speed applications; VC is referred to as a logical, rather than physical path
for a call.
Virtual Tributary (VT)

A structure designed for transport and switching of sub-DS3 payloads. A unit of sub-SONET
bandwidth that can be combined, or concatenated, for transmission through the network; VT1.5
equals 1.544 Mb/s; VT2 equals 2,048 Mb/s; VT3 equals 3 Mb/s; VT6 equals 6 Mb/s.
Virtual Tributary Group (VTG)

A 9-row by 12-column structure (108 bytes) that carries one or more Virtual Tributaries (VTs) of
the same size. Seven VT groups (756 bytes) are byte interleaved within the VT-structured
Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE).
Virtual Tributary, Envelope Capacity

Bandwidth within, and aligned to, the VT superframe that is available for the VT synchronous
payload envelope.
Virtual Tributary, Path Overhead (V5)

One path overhead for every 500 μs located at the first byte of the Virtual Tributary, Synchronous
Payload Envelope (VT SPE). VT path overhead provides for communication between point of
creation and point of disassembly of a VT SPE.
Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE)

Network elements that multiplex/demultiplex the Virtual Tributary (VT) payload. VT PTEs
interpret and either modify or create the path overhead necessary to transport VT payload. A VT
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
PTE is considered a Synchronous Transport Signal Path-Terminating Equipment (STS PTE), a
Line-Terminating Equipment (LTE), and/or a Section-Terminating Equipment (STE).
Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE)

A 500-μs frame structure carried by the VT is composed of VT path overhead and bandwidth for
payload; envelope is contained within and can have any alignment with respect to VT envelope
capacity. The term typically refers to VT1.5, VT2, VT3, VT6, and VTx-Nc SPEs.
VLR
1. Very Long Reach.
2. Visitors Location Register. A wireless telecommunications term; refers to local database
maintained by cellular provider.
VMR
See Violation Monitoring and Removal (VMR).
VSCC
Virtual Tributary/Synchronous Transport Signal (level 1) Cross-connect
VT
See Virtual Tributary (VT).
VT Payload Capacity
The maximum bandwidth within the Virtual Tributary (VT) Synchronous Payload Envelope
(SPE) that is available for payload.
VT PTE
See Virtual Tributary, Path-Terminating Equipment (VT PTE).
VT SPE
See Virtual Tributary, Synchronous Payload Envelope (VT SPE).
VT Superframe
The Virtual Tributary (VT) is organized into a 500-ms superframe structure overlaid on and
aligned to the 125-μs STS1 Synchronous Payload Envelope (SPE), which contains the VT
payload pointer and the VT SPE.
VT1
Virtual Tributary 1.
VT1.5
Virtual Tributary 1.5 (1.728 Mb/s).
VT2
Virtual Tributary level 2.
VTG
See Virtual Tributary Group (VTG).
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
VTx
A VT of size x (currently x = 1.5, 2, 3, or 6).
VTx-Nc
See Concatenated Virtual Tributary (VTx-Nc) and Virtual Tributary (VT).
VUE
Visual User Environment.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
W W
Watts.
W/ft2
Watts per square foot.
WAD
Wavelength Add-Drop.
WADM
Wavelength Add-Drop Multiplexer (-ing).
WAN
Wide-Area Network.
WB-WDM
See Wide-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (WB-WDM).
WDCS
Wideband Digital Cross-connect System.
WDM
Wavelength Division Multiplex (-er, -ing).
WECo
Western Electric Company.
Wide-Band Wavelength Division Multiplex (WB-WDM)

Wavelength Division Multiplexing that uses two optical channels: one at 1310 nm, and the other
at approximately 1550 nm.
Window
Area on the 1301 Network Manager (NM) screen that has a border; can include menus, icons,
buttons, check lists, prompts, and instructions.
Window Border
Window outer edge; use the mouse to select and drag border to resize window.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Window Title
Located in the left side of the title bar; displays the application name.
Windows Application
Refers to an application designed to run with Microsoft Windows™. It does not run without
Windows. All Windows applications follow similar conventions for menu arrangement, dialog
box style, and keyboard and mouse use.
Workstation (WS)
Any one of a variety of Visual Display Terminals (VDTs), ranging from a simple
keyboard/monitor to an intelligent, processor-controlled VDT.
WS DS1
Wayside Digital Signal 1.
...................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
X X-bits
Two overhead bits per DS3 M-frame used as an alarm channel.
X.25
A Packet-switched Network (PSN). Approved by the International Organization for
Standardization (ISO), X.25 defines standard physical layer, data link layer, and network layers,
providing a standard protocol suite for the Data Terminal Equipment-Data Communications
Equipment (DTE-DCE) interface, typically used for Open Systems (OS) communication. X.25
was developed to describe how data passes into and out of public data communications networks.
X.25 networks are in use throughout the world. Standards and protocols for Packet-switched
Networks (PSNs) are from the International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee
(CCITT), now known as International Telecommunications Union (ITU).
XBP
X-Bit Processing.
XCO
Crystal-Controlled Oscillator.
XCV
Transceiver module.
XMT
Transmit module.
XO
Crystal Oscillator.
XON
XON(/XOFF) communications flow control protocol.
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Glossary
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
05.06.01
Index
Numerics INHSWDX (ES64SC, .............................................................

10 Gigabit Ethernet card MX320GA, MX640GA),
B BUSTERM replacement, 3-177
replacement, 3-226 3-81
INTERR alarm (ES64SC, BYPASS replacement, 3-208
2.2 kW step-up converter
replacement, 3-222 MX320GA, MX640GA), .............................................................
3-113
2-kW step-up converter C clean FAN unit protection, 3-181
replacement, 3-183 ISPBUS, 3-83
clean fiber-optic connectors, 3-187
2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up converter lamp test (RAU), 3-126
COM alarm or event, 3-98
upgrade, 3-214 LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC,
............................................................. FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA, CONTBUS, 3-62
MX320GA, MX640GA), .............................................................
A alarm and event condition clearing 3-116
procedures, 3-4 E equipment replacement
LCASSEQ, 3-85
procedures, 3-27
COM alarm or event, 3-98
LSSC alarm (ES64SC,
CONTBUS, 3-62 10 Gigabit Ethernet card
MX320GA, MX640GA),
replacement, 3-226
3-118
facility alarm or event, 3-31
2-kW step-up converter
FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP), MAN alarm (equipment), 3-86
replacement, 3-183
3-67 MISC-1 (MX320GA,
2-kW to 2.2-kW step-up
FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA), 3-112
converter upgrade, 3-214
MX640GA), 3-69 PRCDRERR, 3-89
2.2 kW step-up converter
fuse alarm (FA), 3-65 PWR, 3-91 replacement, 3-222
HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC), BUSTERM replacement,
(FAN), 3-120 3-125 3-177
HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, STBYDBC alarm BYPASS replacement, 3-208
MX640GA), 3-72 (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA),
ES64SC replacement in a
HWCFGBUS, 3-76 3-119
protected configuration,
support procedures, 3-25 3-199
HWFAIL, 3-77
SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, ES64SC replacement in an
IMPROPRMVL alarm, 3-79
MX640GA), 3-95 unprotected configuration,
3-202
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary IN-1
05.06.01
Index
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
FAN replacement, 3-175 ............................................................. .............................................................
FLCCONGI replacement, G Gigabit Ethernet card replacement, O OC-n input/output card

3-158 3-210 replacement, 3-132
FLCSERVA replacement, ............................................................. .............................................................
3-148
H HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm P PRCDRERR, 3-89
Gigabit Ethernet card
(FAN), 3-120
replacement, 3-210 preventive maintenance
HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, procedures, 3-30
module mechanical removal
MX640GA), 3-72
and replacement, 3-130 clean FAN unit protection,
HWCFGBUS, 3-76 3-181
MX320GA to MX640GA
in-service matrix upgrade HWFAIL, 3-77 clean fiber-optic connectors,
procedure, 3-230 3-187
.............................................................
MX320GA/MX640GA FAN dust filter replacement,
I IMPROPRMVL alarm, 3-79 3-179
replacement, 3-168
INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, FAN replacement, 3-175
OC-n input/output card
MX640GA), 3-81
replacement, 3-132 PSF replacement, 3-171
PSF replacement, 3-171 INTERR alarm (ES64SC,
MX320GA, MX640GA), 3-113 PWR, 3-91
RAU replacement, 3-206 .............................................................
ISPBUS, 3-83, 3-85
SFP replacement, 3-144
............................................................. R RAU replacement, 3-206
supporting information, 3-29
L lamp test (RAU), 3-126 .............................................................
XFP replacement, 3-138
LANDEGR alarm (ES64SC, S SFP replacement, 3-144
ES64SC replacement, 3-199,
FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA,
3-202 SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC),
MX320GA, MX640GA), 3-116
3-125
.............................................................
LSSC alarm (ES64SC,
STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI,
F FA MX320GA, MX640GA), 3-118
FLCSERVA), 3-119
See: fuse alarm (FA) .............................................................
SYNCEQPT (MX320GA,
facility alarm or event, 3-31 M maintenance and trouble-clearing MX640GA), 3-95
FAN dust filter replacement, 3-179 procedures, 3-1 .............................................................
FAN replacement, 3-175 MAN alarm (equipment), 3-86
X XFP replacement, 3-138
FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP), 3-67 MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA),
3-112
FLCCONGI replacement, 3-158
module mechanical removal and
FLCSERVA replacement, 3-148
replacement, 3-130
FRNGSYNC (MX320GA,
MX320GA to MX640GA
MX640GA), 3-69
in-service matrix upgrade
fuse alarm (FA), 3-65 procedure, 3-230
MX320GA/MX640GA
replacement, 3-168
....................................................................................................................................................................................................................................
IN-2 Alcatel-Lucent – Proprietary Alcatel-Lucent 1678 MCC
05.06.01

1678 Troubleshooting

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

1678 Troubleshooting

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Use pursuant to applicable agreements

1678 Metro Core Connect (MCC) | Release 05.06.01

About this document

Reason for reissue ...................................................................................................................................................................... xiii

Safety information ..................................................................................................................................................................... xiv

Orientation aids ........................................................................................................................................................................... xiv

Conventions used ......................................................................................................................................................................... xv

Related information ................................................................................................................................................................... xvi

Technical support ...................................................................................................................................................................... xvii

How to comment ....................................................................................................................................................................... xvii

Structure of safety statements ............................................................................................................................................... 1-1

Safety awareness ....................................................................................................................................................................... 1-3

Electrostatic sensitive devices ........................................................................................................................................... 1-17

Product support information ................................................................................................................................................. 2-1

3 Maintenance and trouble-clearing procedures

Overview ...................................................................................................................................................................................... 3-1

Alarm and event condition clearing procedures ............................................................................................................ 3-4

Support procedures ................................................................................................................................................................ 3-25

Equipment replacement procedures ................................................................................................................................. 3-27

Supporting information ........................................................................................................................................................ 3-29

Preventive maintenance procedures ................................................................................................................................ 3-30

Procedure 3-1: Facility alarm or event ........................................................................................................................... 3-31

Procedure 3-3: FA (Fuse alarm) ........................................................................................................................................ 3-65

Procedure 3-4: FANEQPT (FAN, STEPUP) ................................................................................................................ 3-67

Procedure 3-5: FRNGSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) .......................................................................................... 3-69

Procedure 3-6: HLDOVRSYNC (MX320GA, MX640GA) .................................................................................. 3-72

Procedure 3-7: HWCFGBUS alarm ................................................................................................................................ 3-76

Procedure 3-8: HWFAIL ..................................................................................................................................................... 3-77

Procedure 3-9: IMPROPRMVL alarm ........................................................................................................................... 3-79

Procedure 3-10: INHSWDX (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ....................................................................... 3-81

Procedure 3-11: ISPBUS alarm ......................................................................................................................................... 3-83

Procedure 3-12: LCASSEQ alarm ................................................................................................................................... 3-85

Procedure 3-13: MAN alarm (equipment) .................................................................................................................... 3-86

Procedure 3-14: PRCDRERR ............................................................................................................................................ 3-89

Procedure 3-15: PWR ........................................................................................................................................................... 3-91

Procedure 3-16: SYNCEQPT (MX320GA, MX640GA) ........................................................................................ 3-95

Procedure 3-17: COM alarm or event ............................................................................................................................. 3-98

Procedure 3-18: MISC-1 (MX320GA, MX640GA) ............................................................................................... 3-112

Procedure 3-19: INTERR alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) ............................................................. 3-113

Procedure 3-21: LSSC alarm (ES64SC, MX320GA, MX640GA) .................................................................... 3-118

Procedure 3-22: STBYDBC alarm (FLCCONGI, FLCSERVA) ........................................................................ 3-119

Procedure 3-23: HITEMP1 or HITEMP2 alarm (FAN) ........................................................................................ 3-120

Procedure 3-24: SNMPLINKFAIL (ES64SC) .......................................................................................................... 3-125

Procedure 3-25: Lamp test (RAU) ................................................................................................................................. 3-126

Procedure 3-26: MXUPGRD (MX320GA, MX640GA) ...................................................................................... 3-129

Procedure 3-27: Module mechanical removal and replacement ......................................................................... 3-130

Procedure 3-28: OC-n input/output card replacement ............................................................................................ 3-132

Procedure 3-30: SFP replacement .................................................................................................................................. 3-144

Procedure 3-31: FLCSERVA replacement .................................................................................................................. 3-148

Procedure 3-32: FLCCONGI replacement ................................................................................................................. 3-158

Procedure 3-33: MX320GA/MX640GA replacement ............................................................................................ 3-168

Procedure 3-34: PSF replacement .................................................................................................................................. 3-171

Procedure 3-35: FAN replacement ................................................................................................................................ 3-175

Procedure 3-36: BUSTERM replacement .................................................................................................................. 3-177

Procedure 3-37: FAN dust filter replacement ............................................................................................................ 3-179

Procedure 3-38: Clean FAN unit protection ............................................................................................................... 3-181

Procedure 3-39: 2-kW step-up converter replacement ........................................................................................... 3-183

Procedure 3-40: Clean fiber-optic connectors ........................................................................................................... 3-187

Procedure 3-41: ES64SC replacement in a protected configuration ................................................................. 3-199

Procedure 3-42: ES64SC replacement in an unprotected configuration ......................................................... 3-202

Procedure 3-43: RAU replacement ............................................................................................................................... 3-206

Procedure 3-44: BYPASS replacement ........................................................................................................................ 3-208

Procedure 3-45: Gigabit Ethernet card replacement ............................................................................................... 3-210